Skip to main content

Full text of "A laboratory manual of soil bacteriology"

See other formats


BIOLOGY 

LIBRARY 

G 


A  LABORATORY  MANUAL 


OF 


SOIL  BACTERIOLOGY 


BY 

EDWIN  B.  FRED,  Ph.  D. 

r-  / 

ASSOCIATE   PROFESSOR  OF  AGRICULTURAL  BACTERIOLOGY  IN  THE  COLLEGE 
OF  AGRICULTURE,   UNIVERSITY   OF   WISCONSIN 


ILLUSTRATED 


PHILADELPHIA  AND  LONDON 

W.    B.    SAUNDERS    COMPANY 

1916 


a® 

fl 


Copyright,  1916,  by  W.  B.  Saunders  Company 


PRINTED     IN     AMERICA 


PRESS    OF 

W.    B.    SAUNDERS    COMPANY 
PHILADELPHIA 


PREFACE 


THE  exercises  described  in  this  laboratory  manual  are 
arranged  primarily  for  students  of  soil  bacteriology,  soil 
chemistry  and  physics,  and  plant  pathology.  As  far  as 
possible  the  experiments  are  planned  to  give  quantitative 
results.  It  is  assumed  that  the  student  has  had  previous 
training  in  general  bacteriology  and  chemistry. 

The  section  entitled  "Formulae  and  Methods"  is  intended 
to  present  in  a  convenient  form  some  of  the  more  impor- 
tant media  and  methods  used  in  a  study  of  soil  bacteria. 
The  chemical  methods  employed  are,  with  few  exceptions, 
those  given  in  standard  text-books.  Much  of  the  material 
was  collected  and  arranged  by  Mr.  C.  Hoffmann. 

In  addition  to  the  references  given  in  the  text,  frequent 
use  has  been  made  of  the  various  manuals  in  bacteriology. 

Any  suggestions  in  regard  to  improvement  of  the  manual 
will  be  welcomed. 

E.  B.  FRED. 

MADISON,  WISCONSIN, 
October,  1916. 

7 


345373 


CONTENTS 


INTRODUCTION n 

Apparatus  for  One  Student 1 1 

Literature 12 

Laboratory  Rules 14 

EXERCISES  IN  SOIL  BACTERIOLOGY 16 

Number  of  Microorganisms  in  Soil 16 

Relation  of  Microorganisms  to  the  Nitrogen  Cycle 35 

Relation  of  Microorganisms  to  the  Carbon  Cycle 75 

Relation  of  Microorganisms  to  the  Sulphur  Cycle 81 

Relation  of  Microorganisms  to  the  Iron  Cycle 84 

Relation  of  Microorganisms  to  the  Physical  Properties  of  Soil.. . .  87 

FORMULA  AND  METHODS 88 

Cleaning  Glassware 88 

Preparation  of  Culture-media 89 

Media  for  the  Determination  of  the  Number  and  for  the 

Separation  of  Soil  Bacteria 89 

Counting  Soil  Protozoa 97 

Ammonification 98 

Nitrification 100 

Denitrification 106 

Nitrogen  Assimilating  Organisms 108 

Cellulose  Destroying  Organisms in 

Sulphur  Organisms 116 

Iron  Organisms 118 

Yeasts 119 

Fungi 1 20 

Actinomycetes 122 

Algae 123 

Higher  Plants 124 

Preparation  of  Stains 127 

Preparation  of  Reagents  and  Qualitative  Methods  of  Analysis.  . .  133 

Quantitative  Methods  of  Analysis I41 

Special  Methods i5S 


INDEX 165 

9 


SOIL    BACTERIOLOGY 


INTRODUCTION 
APPARATUS   FOR   ONE   STUDENT 

THE  following  apparatus  should  be  in  each  desk.     Any 
omission  must  be  reported  to  the  instructor  at  once. 

1  Bunsen  burner  and  tubing $     .40 

2  Wire  baskets 50 

1  Metal  cup. 25 

2  4-inch  funnels 24 

1  Graduate  cylinder  (100  c.c.) 35 

2  Erlenmeyer  flasks  (1000  c.c.) 80 

4  Erlenmeyer  flasks  (  500  c.c.) i.oo 

2  Erlenmeyer  flasks  (150  c.c.) 30 

50  Test-tubes  (small) 75 

5  Test-tubes  (large) 15 

5  Petri  dishes i.oo 

20  Glass  tumblers : i.oo 

10  Pipets  (i  c.c.) 80 

2  Pipets  (10  c.c.) 30 

i  Hanging-drop  slide 20 

i  Thermometer 75 

i  Platinum  needle 35 

50  Object  slides  (not  returnable) 50 

50  Cover  glasses  (not  returnable) 25 

i  Aluminum  weighing  dish 20 

6  Evaporating  dishes 60 

i  Test  plate .20 

i  Wash  bottle 10 

Filter-paper  (8-inch) 10 

i  Forceps  (steel) 25 

i  Spatula 25 

i  Trowel - 10 

i  Mixing  cloth 10 

i  Slide  box 10 

i  Test-tube  brush 05 

i  Towel 05 

i  Box  of  matches 01 

i  Box  of  labels 

$12.00 
ii 


Sit  BACTERIOLOGY 


LITERATURE 

The  following  list  includes  some  of  the  more  important 
books  and  journals  that  treat  of  bacteriology: 

A.  General  Bacteriology: 

Benecke,  W  ...............  Bau  und  Leben  der  Bakterien,  1912. 

Charpentier,  P.  G  .........  Les  Microbes,  1909. 

Frost  and  McCampbell.  .  .  .Text-Book  of  General  Bacteriology,  1912. 

Hiss  and  Zinsser  ..........  Text-Book  of  Bacteriology,  1915. 

Jordan,  E.  O  ..............  General  Bacteriology,  5th  ed.,  1916. 

Kayser,  E  ................  Microbiologie  Agricole,  3d  ed.,  1914. 

Kruse,  W  .................  Allgemeine  Mikrobiologie,  1910. 

Meyer,  A  ...........  ......  Die  Zelle  der  Bakterien,  1912. 

B.  Agricultural  Bacteriology: 

Conn,  H.  W  ..............  Agricultural  Bacteriology,  2d  ed.,  1909. 

Fuhrmann,  F  .............  Vorlesungen   iiber  Technische   Mykologie, 


Kossowicz,  A  .............  Einfiihrung    in    die    Agrikulturmykologie, 

Teil  I,  Bodenbakteriologie,  1912. 

Lipman,  J.  G  .............  Bacteria  in  Relation  to  Country  Life,  1911. 

Lohnis,  F  .................  Vorlesungen  iiber  landwirtschaftliche  Bak- 

teriologie,  1913. 

Marshall,  C.  E  .............  Microbiology,  1911. 

Percival,  J  .................  Agricultural  Bacteriology,  1910. 

Russell  and  Hastings  ......  Agricultural  Bacteriology,  1915. 


C.  Reference  Books  in  Agricultural  Bacteriology: 

Duclaux,  E Traite  de  Microbiologie,  1898-1901. 

Lafar,  F Handbuch    der    Technischen    Mykologie, 

Bd.     Ill,     1904-1906;     Mykologie    des 

Bodens,  des  Wassers  und  des  Dungers. 
Lohnis,  F Handbuch   der  landwirtschaftlichen   Bak- 

teriologie,  1910. 
Smith,  E.  F Bacteria   in   Relation   to   Plant   Diseases, 

vols.  i,  1905;  ii,  1911;  iii,  1914. 


LITERATURE  13 

D.  Manuals  of  Bacteriologic  Technic: 

American     Public     Health 

Association. . .' Standard  Methods  for  the  Examination  of 

Water  and  Sewage,  1915. 

Burgess,  P.  S Soil  Bacteriology  Laboratory  Manual,  1914. 

Eyre,  J.  W.  H Bacteriological  Technique,  ad  ed.,  1913. 

Giltner,  Ward Laboratory    Manual    in    General    Micro- 
biology, 1916. 

Heinemann,  P.  G A  Laboratory  Guide  in  Bacteriology,  3d 

ed.,  1915. 

Kiister,  E Kultur  der  Mikroorganismen,  1913. 

Lohnis,  F Landwirtschaftlich-bakteriologisches   Prak- 

tikum,  1911. 

Moore  and  Fitch Bacteriology  and  Diagnosis,  1914. 

Muir  and  Ritchie Manual  of  Bacteriology,  6th  ed.,  1913. 

Reed,  H.  S A  Manual  of  Bacteriology,  1914. 


E.  Classification  of  Bacteria: 

Chester,  F.  D A  Manual  of  Determinative  Bacteriology, 

1901. 
Lehmann  und  Neumann. .  .Bakteriologie   und   bakteriologische   Diag- 

nostik.,    Teil   I,    Atlas,    1910;    Teil    II, 

Text.  1912. 
Migula,  W System  der  Bakterien,  Bd.  I,  1897;  Bd.  II, 

1900. 
Winslow  and  Winslow Systematic  Relationships  of  the  Coccaceae, 

1908. 

F.  Journals  of  Bacteriology  and  Related  Subjects'. 

Annales  de  ITnstitute  Pasteur,  T.  I.,  1887. 

Arb.  Biol.  Abt.  Landw.-und  Forstw.  K.  Gsndhtsamt.,  Bd.  I,  1900. 

Biedermann's  Centralblatt  fur  Agrikulturchemie,  Bd.  I,  1872. 

Botanical  Gazette,  vol.  i,  1876. 

Centralblatt  fur  Bakteriologie,  Abt.  I,  Orignale,  Bd.  i,  1887. 

Centralblatt  fur  Bakteriologie,  Abt.  I,  Referate,  Bd.  31,  1902. 

Centralblatt  fur  Bakteriologie  (etc.),  Abt/2,  Bd.  i,  1892. 

Comptes  Rendus  Academic  des  Sciences,  T.,  1835. 

Folia  Mikrobiologica,  i,  1912. 

Jahresbericht  iiber  Fortschritte,  Garungs  Organism  en,  Bd.  i,  1890. 

Jahresbericht  uber  die  Fortschritte  der  Agrikulturchemie,  Bd.  i,  1858. 


14  SOIL  BACTERIOLOGY 

Jahresbericht  iiber  die  Landwirtschaft,  Bd.  i,  1886. 
Journal  of  Agricultural  Science,  vol.  i,  1906. 
Journal  of  American  Society  of  Agronomy,  vol.  i,  1910. 
Journal  of  Bacteriology,  vol.  i,  1916. 
Journal  of  Biological  Chemistry,  vol.  i,  1906. 
Journal  of  Industrial  and  Engineering  Chemistry,  vol.  i,  1909. 
Journal  of  Infectious  Diseases,  vol.  i,  1904. 
Journal  fur  Landwirtschaft,  Bd.  i,  1853. 
Landwirtschaftliche  Jahrbiicher,  Bd.  i,  1872. 
Landwirtschaftliches  Jahrbuch  der  Schweiz,  Bd.  i,  1887. 
*    Landwirtschaftliche  Versuchs-Stationen,  Bd.  i,  1859. 
Phytopathology,  vol.  i,  1911. 
Soil  Science,  vol.  i,  1916. 
Zeitsch.  fur  Garungs-Physiologie,  Bd.  i,  1912. 
Zeitschrift  fiir  das  landw.  Versuchswesen  in  Oesterreich,  Bd.  i,  il 

Agricultural  Index,  vol.  i,  1916. 

Experiment  Station  Record,  vol.  i,  1888. 

International  Catalogue  of  Scientific  Literature,  1901. 

Journal  of  Agricultural  Research,  vol.  i,  1913. 

State  Experiment  Station  Bulletins. 

United  States  Department  of  Agriculture  Bulletins. 


LABORATORY  RULES 

Read  Carefully  the  Following  Rules: 

1.  Before  pouring  plates  or  making  transfers,  wash  off 
the  desk  with  a  i  :  1000  mercuric  chlorid  solution.     Hold 
the  test-tube  cultures  to  be  transferred  as  nearly  in  a 
horizontal  position  as  possible.     Avoid  opening  cultures 
in  a  current  of  air. 

2.  All  cultures  are  to  be  grown  in  the  incubator  at  28°  C. 
unless  otherwise  stated. 

3.  After  using  balances,  always  return  weights  to  their 
proper  places.     Do  not  leave  any  dust  or  dirt  on  balances. 

4.  All    solid    material,   as   soil,   agar,   cotton   or  filter- 
paper,  must  be  emptied  into  waste  jars  and  not  into  the 
sinks. 


LABORATORY   RULES  15 

5.  Soil  should  not  be  sieved  in  the  laboratory.     The 
greenhouse  or  potting  room  may  be  used  for  this  purpose. 

6.  At  the  end  of  the  laboratory  period  return  all  stock 
bottles  and  chemicals  to  their  proper  places  on  the  shelves. 
See  that  all  apparatus  is  replaced  in  the  lockers  and  that  all 
gas-burners  are  shut  off.    Wipe  off  the  table  top  before 
leaving. 

7.  Anything  left  on  the  desk  will  be  collected  after  the 
laboratory  period  and  returned  to  the  store-room. 


EXERCISES  IN   SOIL   BACTERIOLOGY 


SECTION  I 

NUMBER  OF  MICROORGANISMS  IN  SOIL 
Directions  for  Drawing  Soil  Samples 

WHEN  it  is  necessary  to  secure  accurate  samples,  dig  a 
ditch  to  the  desired  depth.  By  means  of  a  sterile  trowel 
representative  samples  may  be  drawn  from  the  sides  of  the 
ditch.  In  this  way  outside  contamination  is  largely  pre- 
vented. 

Samples  from  the  surface  to  i  foot  deep  may  be  taken  as 
follows:  Remove  the  coarse  surface  debris  and  sink  a 
large,  sterile  test-tube  or  metal  cylinder  to  the  desired 
depth.  Samples  of  surface  soil  may  be  taken  with  a  sterile 
spatula*.  Draw  several  samples  and  empty  into  sterilized 
paper  bags  or  other  vessels.  Mix  and  pulverize  the  sample. 
This  may  be  done  with  a  sterile  spatula  upon  a  large  piece 
of  sterile  paper.  From  the  well-mixed  sample  remove  a 
representative  portion  for  dilution,  and  at  the  same  time 
make  a  moisture  determination.  As  soon  as  possible 
after  samples  are  drawn  arrange  to  count. 

Exercise   i 
Number  of  Bacteria  According  to  the  Dilution  Method 

i.  Add  50  grams  of  soil  to  500  c.c.  of  sterile  water  or 
500  c.c.  of  physiologic  salt  solution. 

16 


PROTOZOA   ACCORDING   TO   THE  DILUTION  METHOD      17 

2.  Shake  the  suspension  vigorously  for  five  minutes. 

3.  Allow  the  coarse  particles  to  settle  and  dilute  in  the 
following  manner : 

(a)  Add  i  c.c.  of  the  soil  extract  to  99  c.c.  of  sterile  water;  equal  to 

i  :  1000. 
(&)  Add  i  c.c.  of  dilution  (a)  to  99  c.c.  of  sterile  water;  equal  to 

i  :  100,000. 

(c)  Add  10  c.c.  of  dilution  (b)  to  90  c.c.  of  sterile  water;  equal  to 

i  :  1,000,000. 

(d)  Add  10  c.c.  of  dilution  (c)  to  90  c.c.  of  sterile  water;  equal  to 

i  :  10,000,000. 

(e)  Add  10  c.c.  of  dilution  (d)  to  90  c.c.  of  sterile  water;  equal  to 

i  :  100,000,000. 

4.  Shake  thoroughly  between  each  dilution. 

5.  Inoculate  three  tubes  of  bouillon  with  i  c.c.  from  each 
dilution. 

6.  Incubate  these  at  28°  C.  for  one  week.    At  the  end 
of  two-day  periods  examine   the  tubes  for  evidence  of 
growth,  as  shown  by  turbidity,  pellicles,  or  sediment.     If 
all  cultures  in  dilutions  from   (a)   to   (d)   show  growth, 
there  must  be  10,000,000  or  more   bacteria  present  in  i 
gram  of  soil. 

Note. — If  it  is  desired  to  determine  the  numbers  of  specific  types  of  bac- 
teria present,  prepare  additional  liquid  media.  Use  urea  bouillon  for  urea 
fermenters,  peptone  solution  for  ammonifiers,  etc.  In  this  way  it  is  possible 
to  secure  an  approximate  idea  of  the  number  of  the  various  groups  of  organ- 
isms present  in  a  sample  of  soil. 

Exercise  2 
Number  of  Protozoa  According  to  the  Dilution  Method 

i.  Add  50  grams  of  soil  to  500  c.c.  of  sterile  water,  as 
given  in  the  preceding  exercise. 


1 8  SOIL   BACTERIOLOGY 

2.  After  the  coarse  particles  have  settled,  dilute  as  fol- 
lows: 

(a)  Add  i  c.c.  of  the  soil  suspension  to  9  c.c.  of  sterile  water;  equal 

to  i  :  100. 

(b)  Add  i  c.c.  of  dilution  (a)  to  9  c.c.  of  sterile  water;  equal  to  i  :  1000. 

(c)  Add  i  c.c.  of  dilution  (b)  to  9  c.c.  of  sterile  water;  equal  to  i  :  10,000. 

(d)  Add  i  c.c.  of  dilution  (c)  to  9  c.c.  of  sterile  water;  equal  to  i :  100,000. 

3.  Inoculate    two    tubes    of   protozoa   media    (hay-soil 
extract,  soil  extract,  or  any  medium  adapted  to  protozoa) 
with  i  c.c.  of  each  of  the  above  dilutions  (see  p.  97). 

4.  Incubate  the  protozoa  cultures  at  room  temperature. 

5.  At  regular  intervals  of  two  days  each  make  a  micro- 
scopic examination  of  the  cultures.     Since  the  protozoa 
are  usually  larger   than  bacteria — the  16  mm.  two- thirds 
and  4  mm.  one-sixth — objectives  will  be  found  desirable. 

6.  By  means  of  a  large-mouthed  pipet  or  loop  transfer  a 
small  portion  of  the  protozoa  culture  to  a  slide  and  examine. 
A  wet  or  hanging-drop  mount  may  be  used.     In  certain 
cases  the  small  flagellates  become  so  numerous  that  it  is 
difficult  to  distinguish  between  the  bacteria  and  protozoa. 

Note. — An  abundant  growth  of  large  protozoa  may  be  obtained  if  mannit 
solution  (m.  39)  is  inoculated  with  a  small  amount  of  field  soil  and  the 
culture  incubated  for  one  week  or  longer  at  room  temperature.  A  drop  of 
the  culture  treated  with  Gram's  iodin  solution  will  show  the  presence  of 
numerous  ciliates.  In  certain  cases  the  ciliates  are  marked  by  numerous 
small,  deep  golden  bodies  within  their  cell  v-  a  M  ^apparently  Azotobacter 
cells. 

Exercise  3 
Number  of  Bacteria  According  to  Plate  Method 

In  order  to  reduce  the  error  common  to  determinations 
of  this  character,  it  is  well  to  use  a  large  sample  of  soil. 
All  weighings  should  be  made  as  rapidly  as  possible  to 
avoid  errors  due  to  loss  of  moisture  by  evaporation.  Bal- 


NUMBER  OF  BACTERIA  ACCORDING  TO  PLATE  METHOD   IQ 

ances  sensitive  to  10  milligrams  are  satisfactory  for  this 
work.  Analytic  balances  may  be  used,  but  are  not  neces- 
sary. 

1.  Weigh  20  to  30  grams   of  soil  on  a  piece  of  sterile 
paper  or  scoop,  or  weigh  the  entire  soil  sample,  bottle, 
and  contents;  then  remove  about  20  grams  with  a  sterile 
spatula.     Re  weigh  sampling  bottle  and  contents  and  record 
loss  in  weight.     Transfer  the  soil  to  a  2Oo-c.c.  sterile  water 
blank. 

Note. — Two  hundred  c.c.  of  water  in  a  500-0.0.  Erlenmeyer  flask  allows 
ample  space  for  shaking.  Tap-water  will  be  found  very  satisfactory  for 
soil  counts.  The  water  blanks  may  be  sterilized  in  the  autoclave  for  fifteen 
minutes  at  15  pounds'  pressure.  For  ordinary  work,  provided  blanks  are  not 
stored  for  a  long  time,  thirty  minutes  in  the  steamer  will  be  sufficient. 

2.  Shake   this   suspension   vigorously   for   five   minutes 
and  allow  the  coarse  particles  to  settle. 

3.  Add  10  c.c.  of  this  first  dilution,  equivalent  to  i  gram 
of  soil,  to  a  go-c.c.  sterile  water  blank.     One  c.c.  from  this 
dilution  is  equal  to  o.oi  gram  of  soil. 

4.  After   shaking,  add  i  c.c.  to  a  gg-c.c.  sterile  water 
blank.    (Dilution  i  :  10,000.) 

5.  Transfer  i  c.c.  of  the  above  to  a  g-c.c.  sterile  water 
blank.     As  a  rule,  this  dilution,  which  represents  i  :  100,000 
of  a  gram  of  soil  to  ;?ftph  cubic  centimeter,  is  the  one  from 
which  to  pour  plates.     If  the  soil  is  very  poor,  use  a  dilution 
of  i  :  10,000;  if  very  rich,  i  :  1,000,000.     The  number  of 
dilutions  will  depend  on  the  type  of  soil.     Garden  or  well- 
cultivated  soil  rich  in  organic  matter  requires  a  higher 
dilution  than  poor,  sandy  soil. 

6.  Pour  plates  from  the  following  dilutions  in  triplicate: 
i  :  10,000,  i  :  100,000,  and  i  :  1,000,000. 

7.  Add  about  10  c.c.  of  an  agar  medium,  melted  and  cooled 


2O  SOIL  BACTERIOLOGY 

to  40°  C.,  to  each  plate.  A  blank  plate  or  control  should 
be  poured  with  each  series.  In  case  the  medium  is  turbid, 
heat  slowly,  allowing  the  deposit  to  settle.  Use  only  the 
clear  portion  of  the  medium  for  pouring  plates, 

8.  Immediately  after  adding  the  culture-medium  rotate 
each  plate  to  secure  a  uniform  mixture.  Allow  agar  plates 
to  harden  on  a  level  surface. 


Fig.  i. — Agar  plate  showing  a  common  form  of  spreading  colonies  found 

in  soil. 

9.  Agar  plates  should  be  inverted  and  incubated  under 
a  moist  chamber  at  28°  C.  The  time  of  incubation  will 
depend  upon  the  different  culture-media.  After  five  to 
ten  days  count  the  number  of  colonies  on  each  plate.  If 
the  colonies  are  not  too  thick,  it  is  well  to  dot  each  one  with 
a  pen.  When  the  colonies  are  too  thick  to  count  easily, 
use  a  hand  lens  and  counting  plate. 


NUMBER   OF    BACTERIA    ON   DIFFERENT    CULTURE-MEDIA    21 

10.  Reduce  all  results  to  number  of  bacteria  in  i  gram  of 
soil. 

Exercise  4 

Comparison   of    the    Number    of    Bacteria    on   Different 
Culture-media 

1.  Weigh   out   a   representative   sample    of    field   soil, 
about  20  grams,  and  transfer  to  a  sterile  2oo-c.c.  water 
blank. 

2.  Carry   through   dilutions   as   given   in   the  previous 
exercise.     In  the  last  dilution  use  2  c.c.  to  18  c.c.  of  water 
instead  of  i  c.c.  to  9  c.c. 

3.  At  the  same  time  the  count  is  made  weigh  a  sample 
of  soil  and  determine  the  moisture. 

4.  Pour  triplicate  plates  of  the  following  media:   Heyden- 
Nahrstoff,  sodium  asparaginate,  soil-extract,  casein  agars, 
and  soil-extract  gelatin.     After  melting,  the  gelatin  may 
be  cooled  to  30°  C.  before  pouring  plates. 

5.  Gelatin  should  be  incubated  at  a  constant  temperature, 
about  20°  C.,  for  one  week.     At  regular  intervals  of  two 
days  each  remove  the  plates  and  count  the  number  of 
colonies,  differentiating  between  the  liquefiers  and  non- 
liquefiers.     In  order  to  prevent  a  rapid  liquefaction  of  the 
gelatin,  the  peptonizing  organisms  may  be  killed  by  touch- 
ing them  with  the  point  of  a  silver  nitrate  pencil. 

6.  Compare  the  number  of  peptonizing  colonies  on  casein 
agar  with  the  number  of  liquefiers  on  gelatin. 

Note. — After  counting  the  total  number  of  colonies  on  casein  agar,  flood 
the  plates  with  N/2O  lactic  acid.  After  the  medium  turns  white  the  acid 
may  be  poured  off.  The  lactic  acid  precipitates  the  casein,  which  produces 
an  opaque  white  medium  except  around  the  peptonizing  colonies,  where  the 
casein  has  been  digested.  These  colonies  may  be  distinguished  by  the 
clear  zone. 


22 


SOIL   BACTERIOLOGY 


7.  The  results  of  the  plate  counts  may  be  tabulated  as 
follows : 

TABLE  i. — Comparison  of  the  Number  of  Bacteria  on  Different  Culture-media 


Bacteria  per  plate. 

Bacteria  in  i  gm.  of  soil. 

Medium. 

Total. 

Aver- 

Liquefiers. 

Average. 

f-iquefiers. 

age. 

Total. 

Aver- 
age. 

Average. 

Heyden  Nahrstoff. 

do. 

do. 

Sodium  asparaginate. 

do. 

do. 

Soil-extract  agar. 

do. 

do. 

Casein  agar. 

do. 

do. 

Soil-extract  gelatin. 

do. 

do. 

Exercise  5 
Effect  of  Depth  on  Number  of  Bacteria 

i.  The  samples  for  this  exercise  should  be  drawn  from 
virgin  soil  well  removed  from  any  source  of  contamination. 
Save  some  of  this  soil  for  Exercise  8,  p.  42.  The  type  of 
soil  will  determine  to  a  certain  degree  the  number  of 
organisms  at  different  depths. 


EFFECT    OF   DEPTH    ON    NUMBER    OF    BACTERIA 


2.  Divide  the  sample  of  soil,   taking  one  portion  for 
plate  count,  the  other  for  moisture  determination.     For 
virgin  field  soil   the   following  dilutions  have  been  found 
satisfactory. 

3.  Take  soil  samples  and  plate  as  follows- 


(a)  Surface  soil i 

(fe)  Soil  i  foot  deep i 

(c)  Soil  2  feet  deep i 

(d)  Soil  4  feet  deep i 


100,000. 

10,000  and  i  :  100,000. 
1000  and  i  :  10,000. 
100  and  i  :  1000. 


Follow  the  method  given  in  previous  exercises. 

4.  Pour  triplicate  plates,  using  the  medium  that  gave 
the  highest  count.     (See  preceding  exercise.) 

5.  Tabulate  results  as  follows: 

TABLE  2. — Effect  of  Depth  on  Number  of  Bacteria 


Position. 

Moisture. 

Bacteria  per  plate. 

Bacteria  in  i 
gm.  of  dry  soil. 

Per  cent. 

Total- 

Average. 

Average. 

Surface. 

do. 

do. 

i  foot. 

do. 

do. 

2  feet. 

do. 

do. 

4  feet. 

do. 

do. 

SOIL  BACTERIOLOGY 


Exercise    6 
Effect  of  Moisture  on  Number  of  Bacteria 

i.  Weigh  out  i  kilogram  of  air-dry  field  soil  and  mix 
thoroughly. 

TABLE  3. — Effect  of  Moisture  on  Number  of  Bacteria 


Time. 

Moisture. 

Dilution. 

Bacteria  per  plate. 

Bacteria  in 
i  gm.  of  dry  soil. 

Days. 

7 

Per  cent. 
Air  dry. 
do. 

Total. 

Average. 

Average. 

do. 

• 

7 

15 

15 

7 

3° 

30 

3° 

7 

45 

45 

45 

21 

Air  dry. 
do. 

do. 

21 

15 

15 

21 

30 

30 

30 

21 

45 

45 

45 

EFFECT   OF   MANURES    ON   NUMBER   OF    BACTERIA       25 

2.  Place  2oo-gram  portions  of  the  air-dry  soil  into  four 
small  glass  jars.     One  pint  Mason  jars  may  be  used. 

3.  Adjust  the  moisture  content  as  follows: 

(a)  Air  dry. 

(6)  15  per  cent,  moisture. 

(c)  30  per  cent,  moisture. 

(d)  45  per  cent,  moisture. 

4.  Incubate  the  soil  samples  at  room  temperature. 

5.  After  intervals  of  one  and  three  weeks  determine  the 
number  of  bacteria  according  to  the  plate  method.     Pour 
triplicate  plates  from  the  dilution  of  i  :  100,000. 

6.  Arrange  results  in  tabular  form  (see  p.  24). 

Exercise   7 

Effect  of  Manures  on  Number  of  Bacteria 

1.  Prepare  three  tumblers  or  beakers  with  100  grams 
each  of  field  soil. 

2.  Arrange  as  follows: 

(a)  Control.1 

(b)  Treat  with  i  per  cent,  of  finely  chopped  green  clover. 

(c)  Treat  with  i  per  cent,  of  well-rotted  stable  manure. 

3.  Since    these    substances    contain   great   numbers    of 
bacteria,  especially  the  stable  manure,  plate  counts  should 
be  made  of  the  manures  at  the  time  the  soils  are  treated. 
For  this  purpose  shake  2o-gram  portions  of  the  manures 
with   200  c.c.   of  sterile  water.     Dilute  as  given  in  the 
previous     exercises.     Pour  plates     from     the     dilutions 
i  :  100,000  and  i  :  1,000,000. 

4.  After   mixing   thoroughly   the   soil   and   manure   in 
tumblers,  raise  the  moisture  to  two- thirds  saturation. 

1  Control  or  blank  is  equivalent  to  no  treatment. 


26 


SOIL   BACTERIOLOGY 


5.  •  Cover  the  soils  with  Petri  dishes  and  incubate  at  room 
temperature. 

6.  Determine   the   number   of  bacteria   after   one   and 
three  weeks. 

7.  Before  drawing  the  sample  for  counts  mix  the  contents 
of  the  tumblers  thoroughly.     This  may  be  done  with  a 
sterile  spatula.     In  the  case  of  treated  soils  plate  from  the 
dilutions  i  :  100,000  and  i  :  1,000,000. 

8.  Tabulate  results. 


TABLE  4. — Effect  of  Manures  on  Number  of  Bacteria 


Time. 

Treatment. 

Dilution. 

Bacteria  per  plate. 

Bacteria  in  i  gm. 
of  dry  soil. 

Days. 

Per  cent. 

Total. 

Average. 

Average. 

7 

None. 

do. 

do. 

7 

i  clover. 

do. 

.    do. 

7 

i  manure. 

do. 

do. 

21 

None. 

do. 

do. 

21 

i  clover. 

do. 

do. 

21 

i  manure. 

do. 

do. 

EFFECT    OF    LIMESTONE    ON    NUMBER    OF    BACTERIA      27 


Exercise   8 
Effect  of  Limestone  on  Number  of  Bacteria 

1.  Fill  three  tumblers  with  100  grams  each  of  field  soil. 

2.  Arrange  as  follows: 

(a)  Control. 

(b)  Treat  with  0.5  per  cent,  of  calcium  carbonate  or  one-half  enough 

calcium  carbonate  to  neutralize  the  soil  acidity. 

(c)  Treat  with  i  per  cent,  of  calcium  carbonate  or  enough  calcium 

carbonate  to  neutralize  all  soil  acidity. 

TABLE  5. — E/ect  of  Limestone  on  Number  of  Bacteria 


Time. 

Treatment. 

Dilution. 

Bacteria  per  plate. 

Bacteria  in  i  gm. 
of  dry  soil. 

Days. 

Per  cent. 

Total. 

Average. 

Total. 

7 

None. 

do. 

do. 

7 

\  lime. 

do. 

do. 

7 

i  lime. 

do. 

do. 

21 

None. 

do. 

do. 

21 

\  lime. 

do. 

dp. 

21 

i  lime. 

do. 

do. 

28  SOIL  BACTERIOLOGY 

3.  Use  a  clean  spatula  to  mix  the  soil  and  limestone. 

4.  Add  water  to  bring  the  moisture  to  two- thirds  satura- 
tion.    Cover  the  tumblers  with  Petri  dishes. 

5.  Allow  the  soils  to  incubate  at  room  temperature. 

6.  Make  plate  counts  after  one  and  three  weeks. 

7.  Arrange  the  results  in  a  table  (see  p.  27). 

Exercise   9 
Effect   of   Partial   Sterilization   on   Number   of   Bacteria 

1.  Weigh  out  three  portions,  200  grams  each,  of  garden 
or  field  soil  into  small  jars  (pint  Mason).     The  field  soil 
should  be  mixed  thoroughly  before  sampling. 

2.  Treat  the  jars  of  soil  as  follows: 

(a)  Control. 

(6)  Heat  to  100°  C.  for  one  hour. 

(c)  Treat  the  soil  with  i  per  cent,  of  carbon  bisulphid.  Pour  the  CS2 
into  small  holes  (use  a  glass  rod)  in  the  soil  and  cover  imme- 
diately. 

3.  After  the  soil  in  jar  (c)  has  been  exposed  to  the  action 
of  carbon  bisulphid  for  one  hour,  and  the  soil  in  (b)  heated 
for  one  hour,  determine  the  number  of  bacteria  in  all  three 
soils.     In  the  case  of  the  untreated  soil,  plaj:e  from  the 
dilution  i  :  100,000,  the  heated  soil  dilution  i  :  100,  and 
the  carbon  bisulphid  soil  dilution  i  :  10,000. 

4.  The  carbon  bisulphid  jar.  should  be  left  uncovered  for 
one  day. 

5.  Incubate  all  of  the  samples  at  room  temperature. 

6.  The  second  plate  count  should  be  made  one  week 
after  treatment.     Here  again,  untreated  soil,  use  the  dilu- 
tion i  :  100,000,  and  the  treated  series,  dilutions  i  :  100,000 
and  i  :  1,000,000. 

7.  A  third  count  should  be  made  two  weeks  after  treat- 


EFFECT  OF  PLANT  ROOTS  ON  NUMBER  OF  BACTERIA   2p 


ment,  plating  from  the  same  dilutions  as  in  the  second 
count. 
8.  Tabulate  the  data. 

TABLE  6. — Effect  of  Partial  Sterilization  on  Number  of  Bacteria 


Time. 

Treatment. 

Dilution. 

Bacteria  per  plate. 

Bacteria  in  i  gm. 
of  dry  soil. 

Days. 

I       2         3 

Average. 

Average. 

Beg. 

None. 

Beg. 

100°  C. 

Beg. 

i%CS2 

7 

None. 

7 

100°  C. 

7 

i%  CS2 

14 

None. 

H 

100  '  C. 

H 

i%CS2 

Exercise   10 
Effect  of  Plant  Roots  on  Number  of  Bacteria 

1.  Collect  soil  samples  from  the  immediate  vicinity  of 
the  roots  of  various  plants  (alfalfa,  clover,  etc.),  and  similar 
samples  i  or.  2  feet  away  from  the  plants. 

2.  Prepare  plate  counts  and  moisture  determinations  of 
these  soils. 

3.  Tabulate  results  as  follows: 

TABLE  7. — Effect  of  Plant  Roots  on  Number  of  Bacteria 


No. 

Position. 

Bacteria  per  plate. 

Bacteria  in  i  gm. 
of  dry  soil. 

i       2       3 

Average. 

Average. 

I 

Near  roots. 

2 

Away  from  roots. 

Increase  or  decrease .... 


3° 


SOIL   BACTERIOLOGY 


Exercise   n 
Effect  of  Season  on  Number  of  Bacteria 

1.  In  order  to  study  the  relation  of  bacteria  to  season, 
select  an  isolated  plot  of  soil  high  enough  to  prevent  drain- 
age from  above. 

2.  Draw  samples  of  soil  from  this  plot  at  intervals  of 
two  weeks  each  during  the  fall  and  winter.     If  it  is  not 
possible  to  make  counts  so  often,  plan  to  take  samples 
when  there  is  a  decided   change  in  temperature.     If  the 
soil  is  frozen,  it  will  be  necessary  to  use  a  pick  or  hatchet 
in  securing  samples. 

TABLE  8. — E/ect  of  Season  on  Number  of  Bacteria 


No. 

Date. 

Moisture. 

Temperature  of  — 

Bacteria  per  plate. 

Bacteria  in 
i  gm.  of 

dry  soil. 

Air. 

Soil. 

Per  cent. 

°C. 

0  C. 

123 

Average- 

Average. 

OCCURRENCE    OF    THERMOPHILIC    BACTERIA  31 

3.  Prepare  plates  immediately  on  arrival  at  laboratory. 

4.  At  the  same  time  plates  are  poured  make  a  moisture 
determination. 

5.  Record  the  outside  temperature  and  soil  temperature 
at  the  time  sample  is  drawn. 

6.  Tabulate  results  (see  p.  30). 

f 

Exercise   12 

Effect  of  Cultivation  on  Number  of  Bacteria 

1.  Prepare  two  tumblers  with  100  grams  each  of  clay 
soil. 

2.  Arrange  as  follows: 

(a)  Untreated. 

(b)  Cultivated  every  day  by  stirring  with  a  sterile  spatula. 

3.  Add   water   to   two- thirds   saturation.     Cover   with 
Petri  dishes  and  keep  in  the  incubator  at  28°  C. 

4.  Count  the  number  of  bacteria  after  one,  two,  and 
three  weeks,  pouring  plates  from  the  dilution  i  :  100,000. 

Exercise   13 

Occurrence  of  Thermophilic  Bacteria 

1.  Incubate  several  samples  of  soil  and  some  fresh  stable 
manure  at  60°  C. 

2.  In  order  to  prevent  evaporation  all  samples  must  be 
kept  in  a  moist  chamber.     A  large  glass  beaker  or  metal 
container  may  be  used.     Avoid  glass  bell  jars,  since  the 
high  temperature  may  cause  them  to  crack. 


32  SOIL   BACTERIOLOGY 

3.  After  one  week  in  the  incubator  prepare  agar  plates 
from  the  different  samples.     Pour  from  dilutions  i  :  1000 
and  i  :  10,000. 

4.  The  plates  must  be  incubated  at  60°  C. 

5.  Determine  the  number  of  thermophilic  bacteria  in 
i  gram  of  soil. 

6.  If  desirable,  a  study  may  be  carried  on  of  the  bacteria 
growing  at  low  temperatures. 


Exercise   14 

Catalytic  Power  of  Soils 

1.  Arrange  three  large,  heavy  walled  glass  tubes  with  5 
grams  of  soil  in  each. 

2.  Treat  as  follows: 

(a)  Fresh  soil,  no  treatment. 

(6)  Heat  in  the  steamer  for  thirty  minutes. 

(c)  Heat  in  the  autoclave  at  15  pounds'  pressure  for  fifteen  minutes. 

3.  Set  up  the  following  apparatus   (Fig.   2):  Insert  a 
two-holed  rubber  stopper  into  a  large  test-tube.     In  one 
hole  fit  a  piece  of  short,  straight  glass  tubing  closed  at 
one  end  with  a  rubber  tube  and  clamp;  in  the  other,  a  right 
angle  tube  of  glass  connected  with  a  rubber  tube  8  to  10 
inches  long.    This  rubber  tubing  should  be  fitted  to  a 
tube  of  glass  bent  as  shown  in  Fig.  2  and  connected  to  the 
gas-measuring  tube. 

4.  Fill    the    loo-c.c.    gas-measuring    tube    with    water 
and   invert   mouth   under  water.      Clamp    the   tube   in 
place. 

5.  Then  add  10  c.c.  of  a  1.5  per  cent  solution  of  hydrogen 


G, 

-i 

2 

-3 

—  4 

—s 

—  6 

—  7 

—  sr 

—  9 
—  /( 

—  n 
-i 

-u 

•1'. 
—u 

—  ii 
-if 

-2 

-* 

i 

^ 
-J 

r  "*^  i^^\j 

5r 

H' 

—  ^ 

V: 
^»«*. 

- 

9 

^—  . 

m^& 

ig.  2. — Apparatus  for  determining  catalytic  power  of  soils. 
3  33 


34  SOIL  BACTERIOLOGY 

peroxid  to  the  soil  in  large  test-tube.     Shake  the  tube  at 
regular  intervals. 

Note. — For  this  test  3  per  cent,  hydrogen  peroxid  should  be  made  neutral 
or  faintly  alkaline  to  phenolphthalein  with  dilute  sodium  hydroxid  and 
diluted  to  1.5  per  cent. 

6.  Record  the  volume  of  oxygen  evolved  from  a  definite 
quantity  of  peroxid  after  ten,  thirty,  and  sixty  minutes. 

Sullivan,  M.  X.,  and  Reid,  F.  R.,  Bui.  86,  U.  S.  Dept.  Agr.,  Bur.  Soils, 
1912. 

Lohnis,  F.,  Landwirtschaftlich-bakteriologisches  Praktikum,  p.  120, 
1911. 


SECTION  II 

RELATION   OF  MICROORGANISMS  TO  THE  NITROGEN 

CYCLE 

Exercise  i 
Ammonification  of  Urea 

1.  Prepare  six  2oo-c.c.  Erlenmeyer  flasks  with  50  c.c. 
each  of  urea  solution  (m.  19). 

2.  After  sterilizing,  arrange  as  follows: 

(a)  i  and  2,  control. 

(&)  3  and  4,  inoculate  with  i  gm.  of  soil. 

(c)   5  and  6,  inoculate  with  i  gm.  of  fresh  manure. 

It  is  not  necessary  to  weigh  accurately  the  soil  or  manure. 

3.  Incubate  the  cultures  at  28°  C. 

4.  After  two  days  remove  from  each  flask  5 -c.c.  portions 
of  the  solution,  with  a  sterile  pipet,  to  a  5oo-c.c.  Erlenmeyer 
flask. 

5.  Add  about  50  c.c.  of  distilled  water  to  the  urea  solu- 
tion in  the  large  flask,  a  few  drops  of  methyl  red  or  cochineal, 
and  titrate  against  N/i4  sulphuric  acid. 

6.  From  the  results  of  the  titrations  calculate  the  amount 
of  ammonia  nitrogen  in  100  c.c.  of  the  different  urea  solu- 
tions.    In  order  to  find  the  amount  of  ammonia  formed  by 
bacterial  action,  subtract  the  untreated  from  the  treated 
series. 

7.  Determine  the  percentage  of  urea  transformed  into 
ammonia. 

35 


SOIL  BACTERIOLOGY 


8.  Similar  samples  may  be  drawn  after  three  or  four 
days  and  the  amount  of  ammonia  titrated. 

9.  Tabulate  the  results. 

TABLE  9. — Ammonification  of  Urea. 


Ammonia  nitrogen  in  TOO  c.c.  of  solution. 

No 

1               , 

After  two  days. 

After  three  days. 

Total. 

Per  cent. 

Total. 

Per  cent. 

I 

None. 

2 

do. 

3 

Soil. 

4 

do. 

5 

Manure. 

6 

do. 

Exercise   2 
Isolation  of  Urea-fermenting  Organisms 

1.  Inoculate  duplicate  tubes  of  urea  solutions  as  follows: 

(a)  Medium  19  soil. 

(6)  Medium  19  manure. 

(c)  Medium  20  soil. 

(d)  Medium  20  manure. 

A  small  inoculum  is  sufficient.     In  place  of  tubes  (a) 
and  (6),  cultures  from  the  preceding  exercise  may  be  used. 

2.  Two  or  three  days  after  inoculation  examine  the  test- 
tube  cultures  for  ammonia  production  (Nessler's  reagent, 

P-  i3S)- 

3.  From  one  tube  of  each  medium  showing  abundant 
growth  make  transfers  into  tubes  of  sterile  urea  solution  or 
water  blanks.     A  wide  range  of  dilutions  should  be  made. 

4.  Pour   plates   from   the   different   dilutions   with   the 
same  medium  as  in  the  tube  culture  plus  gelatin  (m.  23). 


PREPARATION    OF    UREASE    FROM    UREA    BACTERIA       37 

5.  Incubate  the  gelatin  plates  at  20°  C. 

6.  Examine   the   plates   every   forty-eight  hours   for   a 
period  of  ten  days.     The  urea  organisms  are  often  character- 
ized by  a  distinct  halo  around  the  colonies.     Under  the 
low  power  of  the  microscope  the  halo  is  composed  of  dumb- 
bell-shaped crystals. 

7.  Make  transfers  to  tubes  of  urea  gelatin  and  incubate 
for  two  days. 

8.  Now  test  the  ammonia-producing  power  of  the  pure 
cultures  by  inserting  sterilized  strips  of  Nessler's  paper 
or  turmeric  paper  in  the  upper  part  of  the  tube. 

9.  Prepare  a  stained  mount  of  these  two  organisms. 

Exercise   3 
Preparation  of  Urease  From  Urea  Bacteria 

1.  Inoculate    two    large    Erlenmeyer    flasks,    looo-c.c. 
capacity,  containing  100  c.c.  each  of  urea  bouillon  (m.  19) 
with   a  pure  culture  of  urea  fermenter.     A  very  active 
culture  should  be  used. 

2.  Incubate  at  30°  C.  until  ammonia  formation  is  very 
evident. 

3.  In  order  to  secure  the  urease  free  of  bacteria,  filter 
aseptically  through  a  Berkefeld  filter. 

4.  Prepare  a  10  per  cent,  solution  of  urea  in  distilled 
water.     Now  mix  equal  volumes  of  the  nitrate  and  the 
urea- water  solution. 

5.  Incubate  the  enzyme  culture  at  48°  to  50°  C.  until  a 
large  part  of  the  urea  nitrogen  is  converted  into  ammonia. 

6.  The  action  of  the  urease  may  be  measured  by  Nessler- 
izing  aliquot  portions  of  the  treated  and  untreated  urea- 
water. 


SOIL  BACTERIOLOGY 


Exercise   4 
Ammonification  of  Gelatin  in  Solution 

1.  Prepare  eight  large  Erlenmeyer  flasks  with  100  c.c. 
each  of  gelatin  solution  (m.  17). 

2.  Stopper  loosely  with  cotton  and  sterilize  in  the  auto- 
clave at  15  pounds'  pressure  for  ten  minutes. 

3.  Inoculate  six  of  the  flasks  with  5  c.c.  of  a  soil  suspen- 
sion. 

Note. — Shake  100  gm.  of  field  soil  with  200  c.c.  of  sterile  water  and  allow 
the  coarse  particles  to  settle. 

The  two  remaining  flasks  keep  as  controls. 

4.  Incubate  all  of  the  flasks  at  28°  C. 

5.  At  intervals  of  two,  four,  and  six  days  remove  duplicate 
flasks  from  the  incubator  and  analyze  the  contents  for 
ammonia  (see  p.  141).     At  the  time  of  the  last  analysis 
determine  the  ammonia  in  controls  and  subtract  from  the 
total  amount  in  the  cultures. 

6.  Tabulate  results. 

TABLE  10. — Ammonification  of  Gelatin  in  Solution 


Ammonia  nitrogen  in  100  c.c.  of 
solution. 

No. 

Time. 

Average. 

Nitrogen 
ammonified. 

Total. 

Blank 
subtracted. 

Days. 

Mgm. 

Mgm. 

Mgm. 

Per  cent. 

I 

2 

2 

2 

3 

4 

4 

4 

5 

7 

6 

7 

AMMONIFICATION    OF    VARIOUS    SUBSTANCES  39 

Exercise   5 
Isolation  of  Ammonifying  Organisms 

1 .  As  soon  as  the  cultures  of  the  preceding  exercise  begin 
to  show  a  vigorous  ammonia  production,  make  loop  trans- 
fers to  tubes  of  sterile  gelatin  solution  or  sterile  water. 

2.  Repeat  the  dilution  four  times. 

3.  Pour  gelatin  (m.  2)  or  agar  (m.  3)  plates  from  dilu- 
tions   i  :  10,000   and    i  :  1,000,000,    using    i-c.c.   portions 
for  each  plate. 

4.  After   colonies   have   developed,    pick   several   pure 
cultures.     These  should  be  transferred  to  gelatin  solution 
and  their  ammonifying  power  studied.     For  this  purpose 
use  Nessler's  reagent. 

5.  Select  two  of  the  organisms  that  produce  the  largest 
amount  of  ammonia.     These  should  be  kept  for  a  later 
study. 

6.  Prepare  stained  mounts  of  these  organisms. 

Exercise  6 
Ammomfication  of  Various  Substances 

1.  Prepare  twelve  5o-gram  portions  of  field-soil  in  clean, 
dry  tumblers.     The  soil  should  be  mixed  thoroughly  be- 
fore samples  are  drawn. 

2.  Treat  the  soils  as  follows: 

(a)  i,  2,  3,  and  4,  add  i  per  cent,  of  casein. 

(&)  5>  6>  7>  an(l  8>  a(ld  i  per  cent,  of  blood-meal. 

(c)  9,  10,  n,  and  12,  add  i  per  cent,  of  dried  clover  hay. 

3.  Add  these  substances  in  the  powdered  form  and  mix 
thoroughly. 


SOIL   BACTERIOLOGY 


4.  Bring  the  moisture  content  of  the  soil  to  two-thirds 
saturation. 

Note. — In  order  to  secure  the  proper  moisture  content  it  is  necessary  to 
take  into  account  the  water-holding  capacity  of  the  added  substances,  e.  #., 
i  gram  of  casein  or  blood-meal  requires  about  2  c.c.  of  water;  i  gram  of 
clover,  about  5  c.c.  of  water. 

Allow  the  soil  to  stand  for  one  hour  or  more  and  remix 
with  a  sterile  spatula. 

5.  Determine  the  amount  of  ammonia  nitrogen  in  samples 
!>  2>  5)  6)  9)  and  10  at  once.     The  ammonia  nitrogen  of 
these  cultures  or  controls  is  to  be  subtracted  from  the  am- 
monia nitrogen  found  at  the  final  analysis.     This  gives  the 
figures  "blank  substracted." 

6.  Cover  the  remaining  tumblers  with  Petri  dishes  and 
incubate  for  four  to  six  days  at  28°  C.     Now  determine  the 
ammonia  content  of  all  of  the  soils.     The  percentage  of 
nitrogen  in  the  different  substances  is  given  on  the  label. 

7.  Tabulate  results. 

TABLE  n. — Ammonification  of  Various  Substances 


Ammonia  nitrogen  in  100  gm.  of 

soil. 

No. 

Treatment. 

Average. 

Nitrogen 
ammonified. 

Total. 

Blank 
subtracted. 

Mgm. 

Mgm. 

Mgm 

Per  cent. 

I 

Casein. 

2 

do. 

3 

Blood-meal. 

4 

do. 

5 

Clover. 

6 

do. 

EFFECT   OF    SOIL   TYPE    ON   RATE   OF   AMMONIFICATION      41 

Exercise   7 
Effect  of  Soil  Type  on  Rate  of  Ammonification 

1.  Weigh    out   four    5o-gram   portions   of   garden  soil, 
field  soil,  and  acid  soil  into  clean,  dry  tumblers. 

2.  Mix   thoroughly   i    per   cent,   of  ground   clover   or 
powdered  casein  with  each  soil. 

3.  Determine  at  once  the  ammonia  nitrogen  in  duplicate 
tumblers  of  the  various  soils. 

4.  Add  water  to  the  soil  of  the  s^x  remaining  tumblers 
until  it  is  two- thirds  saturated.    After  standing  for  one 
hour  stir  with  a  spatula. 

5.  Cover  with  Petri  dishes  and  incubate  for  six  days  or 
longer.     If  casein  is  used,  the  time  of  incubation  may  be 
shortened  to  two  or  three  days.      In  the  case  of  clover 
no  definite  date  need  be  followed,  one  week  or  longer  will 
not  seriously  change  the  results. 

6.  Determine  the  amount  of  ammonia  nitrogen. 

7.  Arrange  the  data  in  a  table. 


TABLE  12. — Effect  of  Soil  Type  on  Rate  of  Ammonification 


Ammonia  nitrogen  in  100  gm.  of 
soil. 

No. 

Soil  type. 

Average. 

Nitrogen 
ammonified. 

Total. 

Blank 
subtracted. 

Mgm. 

Mgm. 

Mgm. 

Per  cent. 

I 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

SOIL  BACTERIOLOGY 


Exercise  8 
Effect  of  Depth  on  Rate  of  Ammonification 

1.  A  portion  of  the  soil  from  Exercise  5,  page  22,  may  be 
used  for  this  study. 

2.  Prepare  sixteen  tumblers  with  50  grams  of  soil  in 
each  tumbler. 

3.  In  order  to  prevent  contamination  of  the  soil  the 
tumblers  and  clover  must  be  sterilized. 

4.  Arrange  thus: 

(a)     i  and    2,  surface  soil. 

3  and    4,  surface  soil  plus  i  per  cent,  clover. 
(&)     5  and    6,  i  foot  deep. 

7  and    8,  i  foot  deep  plus  i  per  cent,  clover. 

(c)  9  and  10,  2  feet  deep. 

ii  and  12,  2  feet  deep  plus  i  per  cent,  clover. 

(d)  13  and  '14,  4  feet  deep. 

15  and  16,  4  feet  deep  plus  i  per  cent,  clover. 

5.  After  six  days'  incubation  at  28°  C.  determine  the 
amount  of  ammonia. 

6.  Tabulate. 

TABLE  13. — Effect  of  Depth  on.  Rate  of  Ammonification 


Ammonia  nitrogen  in  100  gm.  of  soil. 

No. 

Position. 

Nitrogen 
ammonified. 

Total. 

Blank 
subtracted. 

Average. 

Mgm. 

Mgm. 

Mgm. 

Per  cent. 

i 

Surface. 

2 

do. 

3 

i  foot. 

4 

do. 

5 

2  feet. 

6 

do. 

7 

4  feet. 

8 

do. 

EFFECT   OF   MOISTURE    ON   RATE    OF   AMMONIFICATION       43 

Exercise  9 
Effect  of  Moisture  on  Rate  of  Ammonification 

1.  Weigh  into  tumblers  eight  portions,  50  grams  each, 
of  air-dry  field  soil. 

2.  Add  i  per  cent,  of  clover  or  casein  to  each  tumbler. 

3.  Arrange  thus: 

(a)  i  and  2,  air  dry. 

(b)  3  and  4,  15  per  cent,  of  moisture. 

(c)  5  and  6,  30  per  cent,  of  moisture. 

(d)  7  and  8,  45  per  cent,  of  moisture. 

Note. — The  amount  of  moisture  will  depend  on  the  soil  type.     In  this 
case  45  per  cent,  represents  saturation. 

4.  Incubate  at  28°  C.  for  seven  days.     If  casein  is  used, 
four  days  is  long  enough. 

5.  Analyze  and  compare  the  results  of  this  test  with 
those  of  Exercise  6,  page  24.     Prepare  a  combination  table 
from  the  results  of  these  two  exercises. 

TABLE  14. — Effect  of  Moisture  on  Rate  of  Ammonification 


Ammonia  nitrogen  in  100  gm.  of  soil. 

No. 

Moisture. 

Nitrogen, 
ammonified. 

Total. 

Blank 
subtracted. 

Average. 

Per  cent. 

Mgm. 

Mgm. 

Mgm. 

Per  cent. 

i 

Air  dry. 

2 

do. 

3 

15 

4 

15 

5 

30 

6 

30 

7 

45 

8 

45 

44 


SOIL  BACTERIOLOGY 


Exercise   10 
Effect  of  Limestone  on  Rate  of  Ammonification 

1.  Prepare  eight  tumblers  with  50  grams  each  of  soil. 
Use  two  types,  a  neutral  and  an  acid  soil. 

2.  Add  to  each  soil  i  per  cent,  of  clover  or  casein. 

3.  Bring  the  moisture  content  up  to  optimum  for  am- 
monincation. 

4.  Arrange  as  follows: 

(a)  i  and  2,  neutral  field  soil. 

(6)  3  and  4,  neutral  field  soil  plus  i  per  cent,  of  CaCO3. 

(c)  5  and  6,  acid  field  soil. 

(d)  7  and  8,  acid  field  soil  plus  i  per  cent,  of  CaCO3. 

5.  Determine  the  amount  of  ammonia  after  four  or  six 
days. 

TABLE  15. — Effect  of  Limestone  on  Rate  of  Ammonification 


No. 
I 

Soil  type. 

Calcium 
carbonate. 

Ammonia  nitrogen  in  100  gm.  of  soil. 

Total. 

Average. 

Gain  or  loss 
from  limestone. 

Per  cent. 
None. 

Mgm. 

Mgm. 

Mgm. 

2 

do. 

3 

i  CaC03 

4 

do. 

5 

None. 

6 

do. 

7 

i  CaCO3 

8 

do. 

* 

POTASSIUM   PHOSPHATE    ON   RATE    OF   AMMONIFICATION    45 

Exercise   1 1 

Effect  of  Dibasic  Potassium  Phosphate  on  Rate  of  Am- 
monification 

1.  Prepare  ten  5o-gram  portions  of  soil  in  tumblers. 

2.  Add   i   per  cent,   clover  and  hold  the  moisture  at 
two-thirds  saturation. 

3.  Arrange  as  follows: 

(a)  i  and  2,  analyze  at  once. 
(6)  3  and  4,  control. 

(c)  5  and  6,  plus  o.i  per  cent.  K2HPO4. 

(d)  7  and  8,  plus  0.2  per  cent.  K2HPO4. 

(e)  9  and  10,  plus  0.5  per  cent.  K2HPO4. 

Note. — The  dibasic  potassium  phosphate  is  readily  added  from  a  solution. 
For  this  purpose  prepare  a  stock  solution. 

4.  Incubate  at  room  temperature  for  four  days. 

5.  Determine  the  amount  of  ammonia. 

TABLE  16. — Effect  of  Dibasic  Potassium  Phosphate  on  Rate  of  Ammonification 


Ammonia  nitrogen  in  100  gm.  of  soil. 

No. 

Treatment. 

Nitrogen 
ammonified. 

Total. 

Blank 
subtracted. 

Average. 

Per  cent. 

Mgm. 

Mgm. 

Mgm. 

Per  cent. 

I 

None. 

2 

do. 

3 

o.i  K2HPO4 

4 

do. 

,' 

5 

0.2  K2HP04 

6 

do. 

7 

0.5  K2HP04 

8 

do. 

46 


SOIL   BACTERIOLOGY 


Exercise   12 
Ammonification  by  Pure  Cultures  of  Bacteria 

1.  Prepare  ten  portions,  50  grams  each,  of  field  soil. 

2.  Add  i  gram  of  clover  and  bring  the  moisture  to  two- 
thirds  saturation. 

3.  Cover  the  tumblers  with  Petri  dishes  and  sterilize 
in  the  autoclave  at  15  pounds'  pressure  for  two  hours  on 
two  consecutive  days. 

4.  When  cool,  inoculate  each  tumbler  of  soil  with  a 
i-c.c.  suspension  of  the  bacterial  culture  to  be  tested. 

Note. — Prepare  a  suspension  of  bacteria  by  shaking  a  forty-eight-hour-old 
culture  of  the  organism  in  sterile  water. 

(a)  i  and    2,  uninoculated. 

(6)  3  and    4,  unknown  ammonifier  (i). 

(c)  5  and    6,  unknown  ammonifier  (2). 

(d)  7  and    8,  Bacillus  subtilis. 

(e)  o  and  10,  Bacillus  tumescens. 

5.  Numbers  i  and  2  should  be  analyzed  at  once. 

6.  Incubate  for  ten  days  at  28°  C. 

7.  At  the  end  of  this  time  analyze. 

TABLE  17. — Ammonification  by  Pure  Cultures  of  Bacteria 


Ammonia  nitrogen  in  100  gm.  of  soil. 

No. 

Culture. 

Nitrogen 
ammonified. 

Total. 

Blank 
subtracted. 

Average. 

Mgm. 

Mgm. 

Mgm. 

Per  cent. 

I 

No.  i 

2 

do. 

3 

No.  2 

4 

do. 

5 

B.  subtilis 

6 

do. 

7 

B.  tumescens 

8 

do. 

NITRIFICATION   IN   SOLUTION  47 

Exercise   13 
Nitrification  in  Solution 

A.  Nitrite  Qualitative: 

1.  Prepare  five  150-0.0.  Erlenmeyer  flasks  with  2O-c.c. 
portions  each  of  nitrite  solution  (m.  26). 

2.  Inoculate  two  of  the  flasks. 

(a)  Add  approximately  o.i  gram  of  field  soil. 

(b)  Add  approximately  o.i  gram  of  garden  soil. 

3.  Incubate  at  28°  C. 

4.  At  regular  intervals  of  four  to  six  days  remove,  with 
a  sterilized  platinum  needle,  i  drop  of  the  solution  from 
each  flask  and  test  as  follows : 

(a)  Presence  of  nitrites — Trommsdorf's  reagent  (see  page  136). 

(b)  Absence  of  ammonia — Nessler's  reagent  (see  page  135). 

Use  the  spot  plate  for  this  test.     Record  the  date  and 
results  of  test  in  the  table  on  p.  48. 

5.  As  soon  as  the  culture  shows  the  presence  of  nitrites 
and  absence  of  ammonia,  make  loop  subinoculations  into 
a  sterile  flask  of  the  same  medium. 

6.  If  it  is  desirable  to  study  the  nitrite  bacteria  in  enrich- 
ment cultures,  repeated  subinoculations  may  be  made. 

B .  Nitrate  Qualitative : 

1.  Prepare  five  150-0.0.  Erlenmeyer  flasks  with  2O-c.c. 
portions  each  of  nitrate  solution  (m.  28). 

2.  Inoculate  two  of  the  flasks. 

(a)  Add  approximately  o.i  gram  of  field  soil. 

(b)  Add  approximately  o.i  gram  of  garden  soil. 


48 


SOIL  BACTERIOLOGY 


1 

.s 

1 

oo 

M 

H 

£ 

Control. 

I 

i 

CO 

Garden  soil. 

1 

i 

1 

1 

2 
.£ 

g 

1 

1 

Nitrites. 

Control. 

i 

i 

I 

Garden  soil. 

i 

i 

§ 

Field  soil. 

i 

i 

i 

& 

NITRIFICATION   IN    SOLUTION  49 

3.  Incubate  at  28°  C. 

4.  At  regular  intervals  of  four  and  six  weeks  remove, 
with  a  sterilized  platinum  needle,  i  drop  of  the  solution 
from  each  flask  and  test  as  follows: 

(a)  Absence  of  nitrites — Trommsdorf's  reagent  (see  page  136). 
(6)  Presence  of  nitrates — Diphenylamin  reagent  (see  page  137). 

Use  the  spot  plate  for  this  .test.     Record  the  date  and 
results  of  tests  in  the  table  below. 

5.  As  soon  as  the  culture  shows  the  presence  of  nitrates 
and  absence  of  nitrites,  make  loop  subinoculations  into  a 
sterile  flask  of  the  same  medium. 

6.  If  it  is  desirable  to  study  the  nitrate  bacteria  in  en- 
richment cultures,  repeated  subinoculations  may  be  made. 

C.   Nitrification  Quantitative: 

1.  Place  loo-c.c.  portions  of  medium  29  into  eight  i -liter 
Erlenmeyer  flasks. 

2.  Inoculate  each  flask  with   i-c.c.  portions  of  water 
extract  of  different  soils. 

Note. — Shake  50  grams  of  soil  with  100  c.c.  of  sterile  water  and  allow 
to  settle. 

(a)  i,  2,  3,  and  4,  field  soil. 
(6)  5,  6,  7,  and  8,  garden  soil. 

3.  Immediately   after   inoculation   add    5    c.c.    of   con- 
centrated sulphuric  acid  to  flasks  numbered  i,  2,  5,  and  6. 

4.  Incubate  all  of  the  flasks  at  28°  C.  for  three  to  four 
weeks. 

5.  At  the  end  of  this  time  determine  the  amount  of 
nitrate  nitrogen  (see  page  143). 

6.  Tabulate  results  as  shown  on  p.  50. 

4 


50  SOIL  BACTERIOLOGY 

TABLE  19. — Nitrification  in  Solution  (Quantitative). 


Nitrate  nitrogen  in  100  c.c.  of  solution. 

Nn 

,              * 

Total. 

Blank 
subtracted. 

Average. 

Mgm. 

Mgm. 

Mgm. 

Per  cent. 

i 

Field  soil. 

2 

do. 

3 

Garden  soil. 

4 

do. 

• 

Exercise   14 
Isolation  of  Nitrifying  Organisms 

1.  Prepare  eight  tubes  of  acid  sodium  potassium  silicate 
(m.  30). 

2.  Dilute  the  second  enrichment  cultures,  nitrite,  and 
nitrate  organisms  until  i  c.c.  represents  i  :  1000,  i  :  10,000, 
i  :  100,000,  and  i  :  1,000,000  of  the  original  culture. 

3.  Pour  "the  acid  silicate  into  a  sterile  Petri  dish  with 
the  culture  dilutions;  add  the  nutrient  salts  and  enough 
sodium  carbonate  to  harden  the  silicate. 

4.  When  hard,  invert  the  plates  and  incubate  under  a. 
moist  bell  jar  for  three  to  six  weeks. 

5.  Examine  at  weekly  intervals,  using  the  low-power 
objective.    As  soon  as  small  colonies  appear,  make  trans- 
fers to  sterile  nitrite  or  nitrate  solution. 

6.  The  nitrifying  organisms  may  be  grown  on  washed 
agar  (m.  31). 

Exercise   15 

Nitrification  of  Various  Substances 

i.  Prepare  six  portions  of  field  soil,  100  grams  each,  in 
tumblers  or  flasks.     Mix  and  sieve  the  soil  well  before  using. 


NITRIFICATION    OF    VARIOUS    SUBSTANCES  5! 

* 

2.  Treat  as  follows: 

(a)  i  and  2,  untreated. 

(b)  3  and  4,  30  mgm.  of  nitrogen  from  (NH4)2SO4. 

(c)  5  and  6,  30  mgm.  of  nitrogen  from  casein. 

The  proper  amount  of  nitrogen  is  most  conveniently 
added  from  solution.  Prepare  a  stock  solution  in  such  a 
way  that  5  c.c.  equals  30  milligrams  of  nitrogen  in  the  form 
of  casein  or  ammonium  sulphate. 

3.  Mix  these  substances  thoroughly  with  the  soil. 

4.  Add  sterile  water  to  make  half -saturation. 

5.  Cover  with  Petri  dishes  and  incubate  at  28°  C. 

6.  Weigh  each  week  and  restore  loss  of  water  by  evap- 
oration. 

7.  Analyze  for  nitrate  nitrogen  after  ten  and  twenty 
days. 

8.  Express  the  results  in  terms  of  milligrams  of  nitrate 
nitrogen  in  100  grams  of  soil;  also  as  percentages  of  the 
original  substance  nitrified. 

9.  Tabulate  results  as  follows: 

TABLE  20. — Nitrification  of  Various  Substances 


No. 

Treatment. 

Nitrate  nitrogen  in  100  gm.  of  soil. 

Nitrified. 

After  ten  days. 

After  twenty  days. 

Total. 

Blank 
subtracted. 

Total. 

Blank 
subtracted. 

I 

Mgm. 

None. 

Mgm. 

Mgm. 

Mgm. 

Mgm. 

Per  cent. 

2 

30  N.  from 
(NH4)2S04 

3 

30  N.  from 

casein. 

SOIL   BACTERIOLOGY 


Exercise    16 
Effect  of  Soil  Type  on  Nitrification 

1.  Weigh  out  four   loo-gram  portions  of  garden  soil, 
field  soil,  and  acid  soil  into  clean,  dry  tumblers. 

2.  In  one-half  of  the  tumblers  mix  thoroughly  with  the 
soil  i  per  cent,  of  clover  tissue. 

3.  Arrange  as  follows: 

(a)  i  and    2,  garden  soil  untreated. 

(6)  3  and    4,  garden  soil  plus  i  per  cent,  clover. 

(c)  5  and    6,  field  soil  untreated. 

(d)  7  and    8,  field  soil  plus  i  per  cent,  clover. 

(e)  9  and  10,  acid  soil  untreated. 

(/)    ii  and  12,  acid  soil  plus  i  per  cent,  clover. 

4.  Add  moisture  until  the  soil  is  two-thirds  saturated, 
allow  it  to  stand  for  one  hour,  and  remix. 

5.  Cover  with  Petri  dishes  and  incubate  at  28°  C. 

6.  After   three   weeks   determine    the   nitrate   nitrogen 
(see  p.  143)  in  numbers  i,  3,  5,  7,  9,  and  n;  after  6  weeks 
in  numbers  2,  4,  6,  8,  10,  and  12. 

TABLE  21.—  Effect  of  Soil  Type  on  Nitrification 


Nitrate  nitrogen  in  100  gm.  of  soil. 

No. 

Soil  and  treatment. 

After  twenty-one  days. 

After  forty-two  days. 

Nitrified. 

Total. 

Blank 
subtracted. 

Total. 

Blank 
subtracted. 

Per  cent. 

Mgm. 

Mgm. 

Mgm 

Mgm. 

Per  cent. 

I 

Garden. 

2 

Garden  i  clover. 

3 

Field. 

4 

Field  i  clover. 

5 

Acid. 

6 

Acid  i  clover. 

EFFECT    OF    MOISTURE    ON    NITRIFICATION 


53 


Exercise   17 
Effect  of  Moisture  on  Nitrification 

1.  Prepare  eight  loo-gram  portions  of  field  soil  in  clean 
tumblers. 

2.  Add  to  each,  30  milligrams  of  nitrogen  in  the  form  of 
ammonium  sulphate. 

3.  Arrange  thus: 

(a)  i  and  2,  air  dry. 

(6)  3  and  4,  15  per  cent,  moisture. 

(c)  5  and  6,  30  per  cent,  moisture. 

(d)  7  and  8,  45  per  cent,  moisture. 

4.  After  standing  for  one  hour,  mix  thoroughly  the  con- 
tents of  the  tumblers. 

5.  Cover  with  Petri  dishes  and  incubate  for  fourteen 
days  at  28°  C. 

6.  At  the  end  of  the  period  determine  the  nitrate  nitro- 
gen. 

7.  Tabulate  results. 

TABLE  22.— Effect  of  Moisture  on  Nitrification 


Nitrate  nitrogen  in  100  gm.  of  soil. 

No. 

"M"    "   f 

Nitrified. 

Total. 

Blank 
subtracted. 

Average. 

Per  cent. 

Mgm. 

Mgm. 

Mgm. 

Per  cent. 

i 

Air  dry. 

2 

do. 

3 

IS 

4 

15 

5 

30 

6 

30 

7 

45 

8 

45 

54 


SOIL  BACTERIOLOGY 


Exercise   18 
Effect  of  Limestone  on  Nitrification 

1.  Prepare   ten   tumblers   of   soil,    100  grams  in   each. 
Two  types  of  soil  may  be  used,  neutral  and  acid. 

2.  Arrange  each  soil  type  as  follows: 

(a)  i  and  2,  untreated. 

(&)  3  and  4,  30  mgm.  of  nitrogen  as  ammonium  sulphate. 

(c)  5  and  6,  30  mgm.  of  nitrogen  as  ammonium  sulphate  plus  i  gram 

CaC03. 

(d)  7  and  8,  30  mgm.  of  nitrogen  as  gelatin. 

(e)  9  and  10,  30  mgm.  of  nitrogen  as  gelatin  plus  i  gram  CaCOs. 

3.  Stir  in  the  chemicals  thoroughly  by  means  of  a  sterile 
spatula. 

4.  Add  water  and  incubate  for  ten  to  twenty  days  at 
room  temperature.     From  time  to  time  replace  the  water 
lost  by  evaporation. 

5.  At  the  end  of  the  period  of  incubation  analyze  for 
nitrates. 

TABLE  23. — Effect  of  Limestone  on  Nitrification 


No. 

I 

Treatment. 

Nitrate  nitrogen  in  100  gm.  of  soil. 

Nitrified. 

Total. 

Blank 
subtracted. 

Average. 

Per  cent. 
None. 

Mgm 

Mgm. 

Mgm. 

Per  cent. 

2 

do. 

3 
4 
5 

6 

Ammonium  sulphate, 
do. 
Ammonium  sulphate 
plus  i  limestone, 
do. 

7 
8 

Gelatin, 
do. 

9 

Gelatin  plus  i  lime- 

stone. 

10 

do. 

REDUCTION    OF    NITRATES    TO    NITRITES  55 

Exercise    19 
Isolation  of  Denitrifying  Organisms 

1 .  Fill  five  test-tubes  about  two-thirds  full  of  denitrifying 
solution  (m.  33). 

2.  Inoculate  as  follows: 

(a)  Uninoculated. 

(&)  Inoculated  with  approximately  o.i  gram  of  garden  soil. 

(c)  Inoculated  with  approximately  o.i  gram  of  fresh  manure. 

3.  Incubate  at  28°  C.  until  all  nitrates  have  disappeared. 
The  destruction  of  nitrates  is  generally  indicated  by  foam- 
ing. 

4.  At  regular  intervals,  daily  if  possible,  make  qualitative 
tests  (spot  plate)  for  the  presence  of  nitrates,  nitrites,  and 
ammonia. 

.5.  As  soon  as  the  nitrates  are  destroyed  transfer  a  loopful 
of  the  old  culture  to  a  new  tube  of  denitrifying  solution. 
This  may  be  repeated  several  times,  although  a  pure 
culture  is  readily  isolated  from  the  second  transfer. 

6.  Follow  the  same  method  of  isolation  as  given  in  the 
previous  exercises.     Pour  plates  of  denitrifying  agar,  and 
incubate  them  until  the  plates  show  a  good  growth. 

7.  Now  pick  off  several  isolated  colonies,  making  trans- 
fers into  tubes  of  sterile  denitrifying  solution. 

8.  From*  the  pure  culture  showing  the  most  vigorous 
denitrification  make  a  transfer  to  denitrifying  agar.     Pre- 
serve this  pure  culture  for  later  study. 

Exercise   20 
Reduction  of  Nitrates  to  Nitrites 

1.  Prepare  four  tubes  of  starch  nitrate  agar  (m.  35). 

2.  Dilute  two  soil  types  with  sterile  water  until  i  c.c. 
represents  from  10  to  50  organisms. 


56  SOIL   BACTERIOLOGY 

3.  From  these  suspensions  of  soil  bacteria  prepare  dupli- 
cate plates  with  starch-nitrate  agar. 

4.  When  the  colonies  are  well  developed,  pour  over  the 
surface  of  one  of  the  duplicate  plates  a  very  dilute  solution 
of  potassium  iodid  in  dilute  hydrochloric  acid.     Allow  to 
react  for  a  moment  or  two,  then  pour  off.     The  production 
of  a  blue  zone  around  colonies  indicates  a  reduction  of 
nitrates  to  nitrites. 

KI     +    HC1     =     KC1     +     HI 
2HI     +     2HNO2     =     2H2O     +     2NO     +    I2 

5.  Note  the  relative  proportion  of  organisms  capable  of 
reducing  nitrates  to  nitrites. 

6.  Note  the  general  characteristics  of  such  colonies,  and 
from   similar   colonies   upon   the   untreated  plates   make 
transfers  to  nitrate  agar  slopes  (m.  33). 

Exercise  21 
Reduction  of  Stains  by  Denitrifying   Organisms 

1.  Inoculate  duplicate  tubes  of  nitrate  solution  (m.  33) 
with  pure  cultures  of  denitrifying  organisms. 

2.  Add  to  each  tube  0.5  c.c.  of  a  sterile  i  :  1000  (highest 
purity)  methylene-blue  solution  and  mix  thoroughly. 

3.  In  order  to  exclude  partially  the  oxygen,  pour  paraffin 
oil  to  a  depth  of  about  2  cm.  in  one-half  of  the  tubes. 

4.  Incubate  at  28°  C. 

5.  Note  each  day  the  change  in  color.     This  change 
furnishes   a   method   for   detecting   nitrites.     As   long   as 
nitrites  are  present  the  solution  remains  blue.     A  colorless 
solution  indicates  that  all  of  the  nitrite  nitrogen  is  destroyed. 


DENITRIFICATION  -BY   PURE    CULTURES    OF    BACTERIA      57 

This  should  be  confirmed  by  qualitative  tests  with  Tromms- 
dorf's  and  diphenylamin  reagents. 

Methylene-blue.  Leuco-base. 

CeHs— N— (CHs)2  CeH,— N— (CHs)2 

\  /        \ 

^>S  +  H2  =  HN^  ^>S  +  HC1 

CeHa  =  N— (CH3)2  C6H3— N—  (CH3)2 

Cl 

Exercise  22 
Denitrification  by  Pure  Cultures  of  Bacteria 

1.  Prepare  ten  2oo-c.c.  portions  of  denitrifying  solution 
(m.  33)  in  3oo-c.c.  Erlenmeyer  flasks. 

2.  Inoculate  as  follows: 

(a)  i  and  2,  uninoculated. 

(b)  3  and  4,  pure  culture  of  unknown  denitrifier  from  Exercise  19. 

(c)  5  and  6,  Bacillus  pyocyaneus. 

(d)  7  and  8,  Bacillus  Hartlebii. 

(e)  9  and  10,  Bacillus  coli. 

3.  Incubate  all  cultures  for  two  weeks  at  28°  C. 

4.  At  the  end  of  the  incubation  period  make  qualitative 
tests  of  each  culture  for  ammonia,  nitrites,  and  nitrates. 
If  present,  determine  the  amount  according  to  quantitative 
methods. 

5.  In  all  of  the  cultures,  inoculated  and  uninoculated, 
determine  the  total  nitrogen.      Use  the  modified  Kjeldahl 
method  (see  page  147).     For  total  nitrogen  analysis  take 
duplicate  portions  of  50  c.c.  each  of  the  cultures. 

6.  For   determining   the   nitrate   nitrogen   take    lo-c.c. 
portions  of  the  control,  dilute  with  500  c.c.  of  distilled 
water,  and  of  this  evaporate  lo-c.c.  portions  to  dryness. 


SOIL  BACTERIOLOGY 


In  the  case  of  the  inoculated  cultures  with  nitrates  present 
proceed  as  follows:  (a)  Evaporate  10  c.c.  to  dryness,  and 
(b)  dilute  10  c.c.  to  100  c.c.,  and  evaporate  10  c.c.  of  this 
to  dryness  (see  page  143). 

7.  From  the  results  of  the  quantitative  analyses  fill  in 
the  following  table: 

TABLE  24. — Denitrification  by  Pure  Cultures  of  Bacteria 


No. 

Treatment. 

Nitrogen  in  100  c.c.  of  solution. 

As  nitrate. 

Total  nitrogen. 

Begin. 

End. 

Loss. 

Begin. 

End. 

Loss. 

I 

2 

Control, 
do. 

Mgm. 

Mgm. 

Mgm. 

Mgm. 

Mgm. 

Mgm. 

3 
4 

Unknown  denitrifier. 
do. 

5 
6 

Bacillus  pyocyaneus. 
do. 

7 
8 

Bacillus  Hartlebii. 
do. 

• 

9 
10 

Bacillus  coli. 
do. 

Exercise  23 

Denitrification  with  the  Formation  of  Nitrous  Oxid 
(Optional) 

i.  Prepare  in  glass-stoppered  bottles  medium  34  plus 
80  grams  potassium  nitrate  in  each  liter. 


DENITRIFICATION   IN    SOIL  59 

2.  Inoculate  two  bottles  with  10  to  20  grams  of  garden 
soil;  two  with  a  pure  culture  of  a  denitriner. 

3.  Incubate  at  37°  C. 

4.  Place  bottles  in  plates,  so  that  the  overflow  is  collected. 

5.  After  forty-eight  to  seventy-two  hours  remove  the 
stopper  and  insert  a  glowing  splinter.     The  nitrous  oxid 
should  behave  much  like  pure  oxygen. 

Exercise   24 
Denitrification  in   Soil 

1 .  Prepare  eight  loo-gram  samples  of  field  soil  in  tumblers. 

2.  Add  to  each  100  grams  of  soil  60  milligrams  of  nitrogen 
in  the  form  of  potassium  nitrate. 

3.  Treat  the  series  as  follows: 

(a)  i  and  2,  control  untreated. 

(6)  3  and  4,  add  2.5  grams  of  dextrose. 

(c)  5  and  6,  control  untreated. 

(d)  7  and  8,  add  2.5  grams  of  dextrose. 

4.  Mix  these  materials  thoroughly  by  means  of  a  spatula. 

5.  To  soil  portions  i  to  4  add  sterile  water  to  bring  the 
moisture  content  to  about  one-half  saturation. 

6.  To  soil  portions  5  to  8  add  sterile  water  to  bring 
moisture  up  to  total  saturation. 

7.  Incubate  for  two  weeks  at  28°  C. 

8.  At  the  end  of  this  time  remove  a  sample  for  nitrate 
determination  and  dry  the  remainder  for  total  nitrogen 
analysis.     Use   the   modified    Kjeldahl   method   to   include 
nitrates  (see  page  147). 

9.  From  these  results  calculate  the  percentage  of  the 
nitrogen    denitrified,    and    note    the    effect    of    excessive 
moisture  and  excessive  organic  matter  on  the  loss  of  ni- 
trogen. 


60  SOIL   BACTERIOLOGY 

10.  Tabulate  results. 

TABLE  25. — Denitrification  in  Soil 


No. 

Treatment. 

Nitrogen  in  100  gra.  of  soil. 

As  nitrate. 

Total  nitrogen. 

Begin. 

End. 

Loss. 

Begin. 

End. 

Loss. 

I 

2 

\  water  control, 
do. 

Mgm. 

Mgm. 

Mgm. 

Mgm. 

Mgm. 

Mgm. 

3 
4 

\  water  2.5  dextrose, 
do. 

5 
6 

Total  water  control, 
do. 

7 
8 

Total  water  2.5  dextrose 
do. 

Exercise  25 
Autotrophic  Denitrifying  Bacteria 

1.  Prepare   six   tall   tubes   of   Lieske's   culture-medium 
(m.  38).     The  tubes  for  this  exercise  should  be  at  least 
10  to   15   inches   long   and   filled   four-fifths   full   of   the 
culture-medium . 

2.  Inoculate: 

(a)  i  and  2,  uninoculated. 

(&)  3  and  4,  i  gram  of  garden  soil. 

(c)  5  and  6,  i  c.c.  of  sewage. 

3.  Incubate  the  cultures  for  six  to  eight  weeks  at  280:t3^ 

4.  Determine  the  total  nitrate  content  of  the  different 
cultures. 


ISOLATION    OF    AZOTOBACTER  6 1 

Exercise  26 
Nitrogen  Fixation  in  Solution 

1.  Measure  into  four  750-0.0.  Erlenmeyer  flasks  loo-c.c. 
portions  of  mannit  solution  (m.  39). 

2.  Weigh  accurately  just   10  grams  of   soil  into  each 
flask. 

3.  To   two   of   the   flasks   add   concentrated   sulphuric 
acid  at  once,  or  sterilize. 

4.  Incubate  the  cultures  for  three  weeks  at  28°  C. 

5.  At  the  end  of  this  time  analyze  for  total  nitrogen 
according  to  the  Kjeldahl  method  (see  page  145). 

6.  Subtract  the  nitrogen  in  the  soil  and  culture  at  the 
beginning,   from  that  in  the  culture  after  three  weeks' 
growth.     The  difference  represents  the  amount  of  nitrogen 
fixed  by  micro-organisms. 

Exercise  $27\ 
Isolation  of  Azotobacter 

1.  Prepare  four  flasks  (loo-c.c.  Erlenmeyer)  of  mannit 
liquid  medium,  20  c.c.  in  each. 

2.  Inoculate  with  i  or  2  grams  of  soil. 

3.  Incubate  at  28°  C.  and  note  changes  occurring  in 
cultures. 

4.  Every  two  days  examine  the  films  in  hanging-drop 
preparations  and  note  the  predominating  type  of  organism. 
Also  examine  some  of  the  surface  film  in  a  drop  of  water 
mixed  with  a  drop  of  Meissner's  or  Gram's  iodin  solution 
(see  pages  127,  128). 

5.  Dilute  two  loops  of  surface  film  in  a  loo-c.c.  sterile 
water  blank  containing  50  grams  of  clean  sand. 

Note. — The  presence  of  sand  in  the  water  blank  aids  in  breaking  up  the 
gelatinous  clumps  of  the  Azotobacter. 


62  SOIL   BACTERIOLOGY 

6.  Shake  vigorously,   and  transfer   i   c.c.   to  a-  second 
loo-c.c.  blank,  and  so  on  to  a  third. 

7.  From  the  third  dilution  pour  plates,  using  i  c.c.  for 
each.     It  is  frequently  difficult  to  separate  Azotobacter 
from  a  small  organism  known  as  Bacillus  radiobacter. 


Fig.  3. — Azotobacter  stained  with  methylene-blue;  X  1200. 

Exercise   28 
Nitrogen  Fixation  in  Soil 

i.  Weigh  two  5oo-gram  portions  of  field  soil  into  soup 


plates. 


NITROGEN   FIXATION  IN   SOIL 


2.  Treat  as  follows: 

(a)  Control  untreated. 

(b)  Add  2  per  cent,  of  mannit. 

3.  Mix  the  mannit  thoroughly  with  the  soil  by  means  of 
a  spatula. 

4.  Raise  the  moisture  content  of  the  soil  to  optimum, 
and  at  regular  intervals  of  two  days  add  water  to  replace 
the  loss  by  evaporation. 

5.  Incubate  these  at  28°  C.  for  from  fourteen  to  twenty- 
one  days. 

6.  Now  prepare  the  soil  for  analysis.    When  dry,  pass 
it  through  a  20-mesh  sieve,  mix  thoroughly,  and  draw  a 
small  sample  for  analysis;  about  100  to  150  grams  is  enough. 
This  smaller  sample  should  be  pounded  in  a  mortar  until 
the  entire  mass  passes  through  a  loo-mesh  sieve.     Weigh 
out  from  three  to  six  portions  of  10  grams  each  into  8oo-c.c. 
Kjeldahl  flasks. 

7.  Analyze  according  to  the  Kjeldahl  method  (see  p.  145). 

8.  Run  moisture  determinations  on  the  soil  at  the  time 
samples  are  taken  for  nitrogen  analysis. 

9.  Tabulate  results. 

TABLE  26. — Nitrogen  Fixation  in  Soil 


Nitrogen  in  100  gm.  of  dry  soil. 

No 

Total. 

Average. 

Gain  due  to 
treatment. 

Per  cent. 

Mgm. 

Mgm. 

Mgm. 

I 

None. 

2 

do. 

3 

do. 

4 

2  mannit. 

5 

do. 

6 

do. 

64 


SOIL   BACTERIOLOGY 


Exercise  29 
Nitrogen  Fixation  by  Pure  Cultures  of  Azotobacter 

1.  Prepare  six   i-liter  Erlenmeyer  flasks  with   100  c.c. 
each  of  mannit  agar.     In  place  of  the  flasks  large  pans  or 
moist  chambers  may  be  used.     The  object  is  to  use  a  vessel 
that  will  give  a  large  surface  exposure. 

2.  After  sterilization,  inoculate  the  agar  films  with  a 
pure  culture  of  Azotobacter.     This  may  be  accomplished 
by  using  i-c.c.  transfers  from  a  suspension  in  sterile  water. 

3.  Immediately   after   inoculation   remove   half   of   the 
cultures  for  analysis.     These  may  be  treated  with  sulphuric 
acid  or  sterilized. 

4.  A  few  days  after  inoculation  add  10  c.c.  of  sterile 
water  to  each  culture. 

5.  Incubate  the  cultures  in  such  a  position  that  only  a 
portion  of  the  surface  will  be  covered  with  water,  and 
from  day  to  day  rotate.     In  this  way  it  is  possible  to  get 
an  even  film  over  the  entire  surface. 

6.  About  28°  C.  is  a  favorable  temperature  for  growth. 

7.  After  twenty-one  days  analyze  all  of  the  cultures  for 
total  nitrogen. 

TABLE  27. — Nitrogen  Fixation  by  Pure  Cultures  of  Azotobacter 


Nn 

Nitrogen  in  100  c.c.  of  agar. 

Total. 

Average. 

Gain. 

Per  cent. 

Mgm. 

Mgm. 

Mgm. 

i 

None. 

2 

do. 

3 

do. 

4 

Azotobacter. 

5 

do. 

6 

do. 

RELATION    OF    AZOTOBACTER    TO    OXYGEN  65 

Exercise  30 

Effect  of  Variation  in   Culture-media  on  the  Growth  of 
Azotobacter  (Optional) 

1.  Prepare  eight  tubes  of  agar  slopes. 

2.  Arrange  the  culture-media  as  follows: 

(a)  i  and  2,  mannit  agar. 

(b)  3  and  4,  agar  without  mannit. 

(c)  5  and  6,  agar  with  lactose  in  place  of  mannit. 

(d)  7  and  8,  mannit  agar  without  phosphate. 

3.  Inoculate  all  cultures  from  a  suspension  of  Azoto- 
bacter. 

4.  Incubate  at  28°  C.     Examine  every  two  days  for 
twelve  days  or  longer. 

5.  Record  the  growth  of  Azotobacter  on  the  various 
culture-media. 

Exercise  31 

Relation  of  Azotobacter  to  Oxygen 

1.  Prepare  six  mannit  agar  slope  cultures  of  Azotobacter 
chroococcum. 

2.  Treat  as  follows: 

(a)  i  and  2,  untreated. 

(6)  3  and  4,  place  in  an  atmosphere  free  of  oxygen  (see  page  133). 
(c)  5  and  6,  seal  the  tubes  by  melting  the  glass  and  drawing  out  the 
ends. 

3.  Incubate  at  room  temperature. 

4.  Examine  weekly  for  growth  and  pigment  formation. 
If  the  sealed  tubes  fail  to  show  a  brown  to  black  pigment 
after  two  weeks,  open  and  note  the  change  in  color  after 
three  or  four  days. 

5 


66  SOIL  BACTERIOLOGY 

Exercise  32 
Anaerobic  Nitrogen  Fixation  (Clostridiae) 

1.  Prepare  four  small  flasks  of  Winogradsky's  solution 
(m.  41).     Arrange  to  have  the  liquid  high  in  the  necks  of 
the  flasks. 

2.  After  sterilization  inoculate  the  liquid  with  a  pasteur- 
ized soil  extract. 

Note. — Heat  50  grams  of  soil  with  200  c.c.  of  water  for  fifteen  minutes 
at  80°  C. 

3.  Allow  the  coarse  particles  to  settle  and  pipet  5 -c.c. 
portions  into  the  flasks. 

4.  Arrange  as  follows: 

(a)  i  and  2,  sterilize  immediately,  or  add  5  c.c.  of  sulphuric  acid. 
(6)  3  and  4,  incubate  at  28°  C. 

5.  After  twenty-one .  days  analyze  for  total  nitrogen. 
Transfer  the  entire  contents  to  a  Kjeldahl  flask.     In  order 
to  avoid  too  rapid  evolution  of  carbon  dioxid,  the  sulphuric 
acid  should  be  added  slowly. 

Exercise  33 
Isolation  of  Anaerobic  Nitrogen-fixing  Organisms 

1.  From  the  cultures  obtained  in  the  previous  exercise 
make  transfers  into  tubes  of  sterile  Winogradsky's  solution. 

2.  Incubate  under  anaerobic  conditions  for  ten  to  four- 
teen days  at  28°  C. 

3.  Inoculate  from  these  cultures  into  tubes  of  sterile 
water,  and  from  these  dilutions  into  two  tubes  (in  series)  of 
Winogradsky's  agar  liquefied  and  cooled  to  40°  C. 

4.  Pour  plates  in  the  usual  way. 


BACILLUS    RADICICOLA   FROM    DIFFERENT    LEGUMES      67 

5.  Incubate  under  anaerobic  conditions  for  seven  to 
ten  days  at  20°  C.,  and  make  transfers  from  several  well- 
isolated  colonies  into  tubes  of  Winogradsky's  solution, 
and  incubate  as  before.  If  the  cultures  are  not  pure, 
they  should  be  replated. 


Exercise  ffif 
Isolation  of  Bacillus  Radicicola  from  Different  Legumes 

i.  Thoroughly  wash  the  roots  of  several  legumes  (e.  g., 
red  clover,  alfalfa,  sweet  clover,  vetch,  and  soy  beans) 
under  the  tap. 


Fig.  4. — Plate  colonies  of  Bacillus  radicicola  from  clover,  after  ten  days  at 

28°  C.;  X  2. 

2.  Compare  the  number,  size,  and  position  of  the  nodules 
on  the  roots  of  these  different  legumes. 


68 


SOIL   BACTERIOLOGY 


3.  Select  a  large  and  firm  nodule,  cut  off,  and  immerse 
for   three   to   five   minutes   in   mercuric   chlorid   solution 
(i  :  500),  and  finally  in  alcohol. 

4.  Remove  alcohol  by  flaming  and  place  the  nodule  on  a 
sterile  surface  (flamed  slide). 


'  Fig.  5. — Bacillus  radicicola  from  a  root  nodule  of  alfalfa;  X  1200. 

5.  Cut  open  with  a  sterile  knife  and  take  out  some  of  the 
inner  contents. 

6.  Inoculate  this  bacterial  mass  from  the  nodule  into  a 
few  drops  of  water  in  a  Petri  dish. 

7.  Make  two  or  more  loop  transfers  from  the  first  Petri 


FORMATION    OF    NODULES    BY    BACILLUS    RADICICOLA      69 

dish  to  a  second  containing  a  few  drops  of  water.     Repeat 
these  dilutions  to  a  third  and  fourth  Petri  dish. 

8.  Pour  mannit  agar  (m.  42)  into  each  dish,  agitate  until 
the  organisms  are  equally  distributed,  and  incubate  at  28°  C. 

9.  After  six  to  eight  days  examine  plates.     The  legume 
colonies  should  be  characterized  by  a  raised  moist  surface 
and  round  entire  form,  at  first  glistening,  later  changing 
to  an  opaque  white.     In  size  these  colonies  vary  from  ij 
to  4  mm.  in  diameter. 

Exercise   35 
Formation  of  Nodules  by  Bacillus  Radicicola 

1.  Wash  thoroughly  the  seeds  of  several  legumes  (alfalfa, 
crimson  clover,  red  clover,  etc.)  and  immerse  in  mercuric 
chlorid  (HgCfe)  solution  (i  :  500)  for  three  to  five  minutes. 
For  careful  work,  treat  the  seeds  with  mercuric  chlorid 
in  a  partial  vacuum. 

2.  Remove  from  mercuric    chlorid    solution    and    rinse 
in-sterile  water. 

3.  Next  drop  one  or  two  seeds  of  each  legume  into  a 
large  tube  containing  soft  mannit  agar  or  a  loose  mass  of 
filter-paper  pulp. 

4.  Arrange  as  follows: 


(a)  i  and  2,  alfalfa  uninoculated. 

(6)  3  and  4,  alfalfa  inoculated  with  culture  iso^Ri  by  student. 

(c)   5  and  6,  alfalfa  inoculated  with  culture  fjmn  instructor. 

In  the  case  of  large  legumes — ef  g.,  soy  beans — it  is 
necessary  to  use  vessels  larger  than  ordinary  test-tubes. 

5.  To  inoculate,  use  a  forty-eight-hour-old  culture  of 
the  legume  bacteria.  Prepare  a  water  suspension  and  from 
this  take  i  c.c.  for  each  tube. 


7o 


SOIL  BACTERIOLOGY 


6.  Under  favorable  conditions  nodules  will  begin  to  form 
in  ten  to  fifteen  days. 


Fig.  6. — Showing  inoculated  alfalfa  plant. 

7.  Keep  the  cultures  in  a  warm  place — greenhouse  or 
near  a  window. 

8.  After  four  and  six  weeks  examine  carefully  for  nodules, 
noting  the  number,  size,  shape,  and  location. 


EFFECT  .OF    BACILLUS    RADICICOLA    ON   ALFALFA         71 


kLFALFA  ALFALFA 

'NOCULATEO 

' 


Fig.  7. — Alfalfa  in  sterilized  sand  to  which  plant  food  minus  nitrogen  has 

been  added. 


Exercise  36 

Effect   of   Bacillus   Radicicola   on  the   Growth   and  the 
Nitrogen  Content  of  Alfalfa  (Optional) 

i.  Prepare  four  J-gallon  jars  of  clean  sand  and  four  of 
coal-ashes. 


72  SOIL  BACTERIOLOGY 

2.  Plant  to  alfalfa  as  follows: 

(a)  i  and  2,  sand  uninoculated. 
(&)  3  and  4,  sand  inoculated. 

(c)  5  and  6,  coal-ashes  uninoculated. 

(d)  7  and  8,  coal-ashes  inoculated. 

3.  One   week   after  seedlings  begin   to   germinate   add 
100  c.c.  per  jar  of  plant  food  minus  nitrogen. 


Note.  —  Plant  food:    Add  10  grams  of  CaSO4  -\-  2HzO,  4.6  grams  of 
KH2PO4,  and  2.3  grams  of  MgSO4  +  7H2O  to  1000  c.c.  of  water. 

4.  This  nutrient  solution  should  be  added  at  intervals 
of  every  two  weeks  or  whenever  needed.    A  few  drops  of 
iron  chlorid  or  iron  phosphate  will  be  found  beneficial. 

5.  After  four  to  six  weeks  examine  for  nodules. 

6.  When  mature,  cut  and  analyze  the  tissue  for  total 
nitrogen. 

Exercise  37 

Effect  of  Caffein  on  the  Formation  of  Bacteroids  (Optional) 

1.  Inoculate  in  duplicate  tubes  of  agarwith  and  without 
cafTein  (m.  46). 

2.  Prepare  caffein  agar  slant  cultures  of  the  following 
organisms:  Bacillus  radicicola,  from  alfalfa,  pea,  and  vetch. 

3.  At  regular  two-day  intervals  study  the  morphology 
of  the  organisms  from  the  different  cultures. 

Exercise  38 
Nitrogen  Fixation  by  Bacillus  Radicicola  in  Solution 

1.  Prepare  four  5oo-c.c.  Erlenmeyer  flasks  with  100  c.c. 
each  of  mannit  soil  extract  (m.  43). 

2.  Arrange  as  follows: 

(a)  i  and  2,  uninoculated. 

(6)  3  and  4,  inoculated  with  a  pure  culture  of  alfalfa  bacteria. 


ARTIFICIAL   CULTURES    FOR    INOCULATION    OF    LEGUMES     73 

3.  Incubate  at  28°  C.  for  three  weeks. 

4.  Then  analyze  for  total  nitrogen. 

Exercise  39 
Production  of  Gum  by  Bacillus  Radicicola 

1.  Inoculate  two  tubes  of  different  media  (42  and  47) 
with  Bacillus  radicicola,  and  at  the  same  time  leave  two 
tubes  uninoculated. 

2.  Incubate  for  four  to  five  weeks  at  28°  C.,  and  test  for 
gum. 

3.  Add  10  c.c.  of  alcohol  (95  per  cent.)  or  5  c.c.  of  acetone 
to  each  tube. 

4.  Note  the  precipitation  of  gum. 

Exercise  40 
Artificial  Cultures  for  the  Inoculation  of  Legumes 

A.  i.  Inoculate  one  bottle  of  mannit  agar  (m.  42)  and 
one  of  mannit  solution  with  a  pure  culture  of  legume 
bacteria.  Use  5oo-c.c.  bottles  with  flat  sides.  In  the 
liquid  culture  take  300  c.c.  of  the  medium;  in  the  agar 
culture,  100  c.c.  Dilute  a  young  legume  culture  of  the 
desired  organism  with  5  c.c.  of  sterile  water.  Shake 
thoroughly  and  pipet  i-c.c.  portions  into  the  bottles  of 
liquid  and  solid  media.  Be  sure  that  the  inoculum  covers 
the  entire  surface  of  the  agar. 

2.  Incubate  the  cultures  at  28°  C.  for  four  to  ten  days. 

3.  Determine  the  number  of  bacteria  in  each  bottle.     The 
liquid  culture  may  be  treated  as  follows:   Shake  thoroughly, 
remove  i  c.c.  to  a  gg-c.c.  water  blank,  and  continue  the 
dilution  to  i  :  1,000,000  and  i  :  10,000,000.     Pour  mannit 
agar  plates. 


74  SOIL   BACTERIOLOGY 

Follow  the  same  procedure  with  the  solid  culture,  adding 
200  c.c.  of  sterile  water  to  the  agar.  Shake  thoroughly, 
dilute,  and  plate  as  given  in  the  preceding  directions. 

B.  i.  Place  about  ten  bacteria-free  seeds  in  each  culture 
bottle.  Shake  and  pour  off  the  liquid. 

2.  With  sterile  forceps  remove  about  five  seeds  to  a 
sterile  Petri  dish. 

3.  Allow  seeds  to  dry  in  the  Petri  dish. 

4.  After    twenty-four    to    forty-eight   hours    count   the 
number  of  legume  bacteria  on  each  seed. 

5.  Place  the  seeds  in  a   zoo-c.c.   water  blank,   shake, 
and  plate  i-c.c.  portions. 

Exercise  41 
Nitrogen  Content  of  Bacteria  (Optional) 

1.  Grow  a  mass  culture  of  bacteria  in  a  large  Petri  dish 
or  pan.    Any  vigorous  growing  organism  may  be  used, 
e.  g.,  Azotobacter. 

Note. — Use  2  to  2.5  per  cent.  agar. 

2.  When  cool,  inoculate  the  surface  of  the  agar  with 
5  c.c.  of  a  rich  suspension  of  Azotobacter  in  sterile  water. 

3.  Incubate  ten  to  fifteen  days. 

4.  At  the  end  of  this  time  remove  growth  by  carefully 
scraping  off  with  a  clean  glass  slide. 

5.  Dry  the  mass  culture  at  100°  C.  and  pulverize  by 
grinding  in  a  mortar. 

6.  Analyze  for  total  nitrogen.     If  desirable,  a  portion 
of  the  material  may  be  saved  for  further  analysis — e.  g., 
potassium  and  phosphorus. 


SECTION  III 
RELATION  OF  MICROORGANISMS  TO  THE  CARBON  CYCLE 

Exercise   i 
Fermentation  of  Cellulose  in  Impure  Cultures  (Liquid) 

1.  FILL  six  large  test-tubes  about  half -full  of  Omelianski's 
solution  (m.  48). 

2.  Add  four  strips  of  filter-paper  to  each  tube. 

3.  Treat  as  follows: 

(a)  i  and  2,  uninoculated. 

(b)  3  and  4,  stable  manure. 

(c)  5  and  6,  garden  soil. 

4.  Incubate  at  28°  C. 

5.  Cover  the  solution  in  tubes  i,  3,  and  5  with  f-inch 
layer  of  paraffin  oil. 

6.  Examine  the  cultures  at  regular  intervals,  taking  note 
of  the  changes  in  the  filter-paper. 

7.  When  the  filter-paper  shows  the  first  evidences  of 
disintegration,  make  transfers  to  new  tubes  of  Omelianski's 
medium. 

Exercise  2 
Fermentation  of  Cellulose  in  Impure  Cultures  (Soil) 

i.  Place  2oo-gram  portions  of  garden  soil  in  three  i -liter 
Erlenmeyer  flasks. 

75 


76  SOIL  BACTERIOLOGY 

2.  Treat  as  follows: 

(a)  Control. 

(&)  Add  i  per  cent,  of  sugar. 

(c)  Add  i  per  cent,  of  green  clover. 

3.  Bring  the  moisture  content  of  the  soil  up  to  two- thirds 
saturation. 

4.  Insert  one  round  filter-paper,  diameter  smaller  than 
that  of  the  flask,  into  each  culture.     Partially  cover  the 
filter-paper  with  soil. 

5.  Incubate  at  28°  C. 

6.  At  weekly  intervals  examine.    Note  the  change  in  the 
filter-paper. 

Exercise  3 
Fermentation  of  Cellulose  in  Soil 

1.  Prepare  four  large  soup  plates  with  500  grams  each  of 
soil.     Use  two  plates  of  field  and  two  plates  of  garden 
soil. 

2.  Add  to  each  plate  5  grams  of  dry  filter-paper  cut  into 
strips  about  2  inches  long  and  J  inch  wide.     These  should 
be  thoroughly  mixed  with  the  soil  and  a  little  more  water 
than  necessary  for  half -saturation  added. 

3.  In  order  to  avoid  rapid  evaporation  cover  with  inverted 
plates  and  keep  the  moisture  constant. 

4.  After  six  to  eight  weeks  remove  the  remaining  paper 
from  the  soil  by  passing  the  soil  through  a  fine  mesh  sieve. 
Now  wash   the   paper,   dry,   and   weigh.     Although   this 
procedure  does  not  always  give  uniform  results,  it  will 
show  the  relative  cellulose-destroying  power  of  the  soil. 


ISOLATION    OF    CELLULOSE    BACTERIA  77 

Exercise   4 

— — . 

Fermentation  of  Cellulose  by  Denitrifying  Bacteria 

1.  Fill   completely   two   Erlenmeyer   flasks   of    2oo-c.c. 
capacity  each  with  medium  37. 

2.  Inoculate  as  follows: 

(a)  i  c.c.  of  a  rich  sewage  suspension. 
(&)   i  gram  of  garden  soil. 

3.  Incubate  at  35°  C.  in  a  pan  or  plate  so  arranged  as  to 
catch  the  overflow  from  the  flasks.     After  one  week  the 
cultures  should  begin  to  show  fermentation,  and  by  the 
end  of  the  second  or  third  week  all  nitrates  should  be  de- 
stroyed. 

4.  When  the  solution  no  longer  reacts  for  nitrates  pour 
the  turbid  liquid  off  without  removing  the  paper.     Refill 
the  flask  with  the  same  medium  minus  the  paper.     Now 
the  process  should  proceed  very  much  faster  than  in  the 
case  of  the  first  inoculation. 

5.  The  addition  of  new  culture-media  may  be  repeated 
several  times. 

Exercise   5 

Isolation  of  Cellulose  Bacteria 

A.  Without  Enrichment  Cultures: 

1.  Dilute  samples  of  soil  in  such  a  way  that  plates  may 
be  made  representing  various  dilutions,  about  i  :  10,000 
and  i  :  100,000  of  a  gram  of  the  original  material. 

2.  Garden,  field,  and  marsh  soil  should  be  used. 

3.  Plate  all  of  these  inocula  with  medium  52. 

B.  With  Enrichment  Cultures: 

i.  At  the  same  time  plates  are  poured  for  A  make 
transfers  from  the  enrichment  culture,  Exercise  i,  in  sterile 
99-c.c.  water  blanks. 


78  SOIL   BACTERIOLOGY 

2.  From  the  first  gg-c.c.  water  blank  make  i-c.c.  transfer 
to  a  second  and  a  third. 

3.  Pour  cellulose  agar  plates  from  the  second  and  third 
dilution. 

4.  Incubate  all  of  the  plates  under  a  bell  jar  at  28°  C. 
Very  often  the  cellulose  organisms  do  not  appear  for  several 
weeks. 

5.  Look  for  the  colonies  with  clear  zones. 

Exercise  6 
Formation  of  Carbon  Dioxid  from  Organic  Substances 

1.  For  this  exercise  use  a  field  soil  and  adjust  the  moisture 
content  to  about  half -saturation. 

2.  Mix   thoroughly   so   as   to   have   the   entire   sample 
uniform. 

3.  Weigh  into  suction  flasks  (2-liter  capacity)  four  equal 
quantities  of  the  soil,  i  kilo  each,  and  treat  as  follows: 

(a)  Untreated. 

(6)  Add  2  per  cent,  of  finely  ground  vegetable  matter,   clover,   corn, 
beet  leaves,  or  something  similar. 

(c)  Add  2  per  cent,  of  air-dried  and  finely  ground  barnyard  manure. 

(d)  Add  i  per  cent,  of  cane-sugar. 

4.  Connect  to  a  glass  cylinder  so  arranged  with  glass 
beads  and  alkali  that  the  carbon  dioxid   (C02)   will  be 
caught  as  it  is  drawn  through  the  solution. 

5.  Every   forty-eight  hours   determine   the   amount   of 
carbon  dioxid  by  drawing  a  current  of  air  through  the 
apparatus  for  twenty  minutes  with  a  water-pump  (see  page 
150).     Free  the  current  of  air  from  carbon  dioxid  by  pass- 
ing through  strong  N/i  potassium  hydroxid.     In  order  to 
regulate  the  air,  count  the  number  of  air  bubbles. 


FORMATION   OF   HUMUS   IN    SOIL    (OPTIONAL)  79 

6.  Allow  the  experiment  to  run  for  twelve  days. 

7.  Arrange  the  results  in  a  table. 

TABLE  28. — The  Influence  of  Organic  Substances  on  the  Evolution  of  Carbon 
Dioxid  from  Soil 


Carbon  dioxid  in  too  gm.  of  soil. 

Two-day  periods. 

Control. 

Clover 
2  per  cent. 

Barnyard 
manure 
2  per  cent. 

Cane-sugar 
2  per  cent. 

Mgm. 

Mgm. 

Mgm. 

Mg-m. 

I 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

Total 

Exercise  7 
Formation  of  Humus  in  Soil  (Optional) 

1.  Prepare  a  uniform  sample  of  soil  (air-dry)  by  passing 
through  a  sieve. 

2.  Weigh  out  5oo-gram  portions  and  treat  as  follows: 

(a)  Control. 

(b)  Add  2  per  cent,  finely  ground  wheat  straw. 

(c)  Add  2  per  cent,  finely  ground  alfalfa. 

(d)  Add  2  per  cent,  finely  ground  dry  manure. 

(e)  Sterile,  no  additional  treatment. 

(/)   Add  2  per  cent,  finely  ground  wheat  straw;  sterilize. 

(g)  Add  2  per  cent,  finely  ground  alfalfa;  sterilize. 

(h)  Add  2  per  cent,  finely  ground  dry  manure;  sterilize. 


3.  Pint  or  quart  Mason  jars  can  be  used  as  receptacles 
for  the  various  soils. 


80  SOIL  BACTERIOLOGY 

4.  Add  sufficient  sterile  water  to  bring  moisture  content 
up  to  two- thirds  saturation. 

5.  Cover  loosely  with  a  Petri  dish  and  incubate  three  to 
four  months,  restoring  moisture  from  time  to  time. 

6.  At  the  end  of  this  time  prepare  the  cultures  for  analysis. 

7.  Dry  and  determine  the  amount  of  humus  in  lo-gram 
samples  (see  page  148). 


SECTION  IV 

RELATION  OF  MICROORGANISMS  TO  THE  SULPHUR 
CYCLE 

Exercise   i 

Reduction  of  Sulphates  with  the  Formation  of  Hydrogen 

Sulphid 

1.  PREPARE  three   small    bottles  of  sulphate  solution 

(m.  55)- 

2.  Inoculate  as  follows: 

(a)  Uninoculated. 

(&)   i  gram  of  rich  soil. 

(c)   i  c.c.  of  sewage  slime. 

3.  Stopper  tightly  with  paraffined  corks. 

4.  Incubate  at  28°  C.  for  two  or  four  weeks. 

5.  At  the  end  of  this  time  remove  bottles  from  incubator; 
note  the  change  in  color  and  odor. 

6.  Hold  over  the  open  mouth  of  the  bottle  a  small  piece 
of  filter-paper  saturated  with  a  solution  of  lead  acetate. 
A  blackening  of  the  paper  shows  the  presence  of  hydrogen 
sulphid. 

7.  Remove  a  few  cubic  centimeters  with  a  pipet  to  a 
test-tube  or  small  Erlenmeyer  flask. 

8.  Add  a  few  drops  of  BaCl2  solution. 

9.  Compare   the   amount   of   white   precipitate   in   the 
inoculated  cultures  with  that  in  the  uninoculated  control. 

6  81 


8  2  SOIL  BACTERIOLOGY 

10.  The  amount  of  hydrogen  sulphid  may  be  determined 
quantitatively  by  titrating  with  iodin  and  sodium  thio- 
sulphate  (see  page  154). 

Exercise  2 
Isolation  of  Hydrogen  Sulphid  Organisms 

1.  Prepare    four    tubes    of    sulphate-reducing    gelatin 
(m.  56). 

2.  Inoculate  shake  cultures  of  the  gelatin  with  various 
dilutions  of  the  impure  cultures  from  the  previous  exercise. 

3.  Harden  the  gelatin  cultures  in  cold  water  and  incubate 
at  room  temperature  four  to  seven  days  in  an  anaerobic 
jar  (seepage  133). 

4.  In  case  black  colonies  appear  in  the  tubes,  attempt  to 
isolate  the  organisms  by  making  subinoculations  into  the 
sulphate  gelatin. 

Exercise  3 
Hydrogen  Sulphid  from  Protein  and  Sulphur  (Optional) 

1.  Prepare  two  small  bottles  of  culture  solutions   (i) 
and  (2)  (m.  59). 

2.  Treat  as  follows: 

(a)  Solution  i,  uninoculated. 

(b)  Solution  i,  i  gram  garden  soil. 

(c)  Solution  2,  uninoculated. 

(d)  Solution  2,  i  gram  garden  soil. 

3.  Compare  the  changes  that  take  place  in  solutions 
(!)  and  (2). 


OXIDATION    OF    THIOSULPHATES  83 

Exercise  4 
Oxidation  of  Thiosulphates 

1.  Place  in  four  flasks  (300-0.0.  Erlenmeyer)  about  20 
c.c.  each  of  Nathansohn's  solution  (m.  60). 

2.  Inoculate   two   flasks  with   o.i   gram   of  soil  each. 
Leave  two  flasks  uninoculated. 

3.  Incubate  for  four  weeks  at  28°  C. 

4.  Remove  the  flasks  from  incubator  and  test  for  sul- 
phates. 


SECTION  V 

RELATION   OF  MICROORGANISMS  TO   THE  IRON   CYCLE 

Exercise   i 
A  Method  for  Growing  Crenothrix  and  Spirophyllum 

1.  CLEAN  and  sterilize  a  Berkefeld  filter. 

2.  Connect  the  filter  to  the  city  water-supply  and  allow 
the  water  to  run  slowly  for  twenty-four  hours. 

3.  Remove  the  metal  cap  from  the  filter  and  place  in  a 
large  beaker  of  iron  solution  (m.  61). 

4.  Incubate  in  the  ice-box  or  at  15°  to  20°  C. 

5.  At  regular   two-day   intervals  examine   the  deposit 
on  the  sides  of  the  filter. 

6.  If  bacteria  are  found,  test  for  iron.    Add  a  few  drops 
of  a  5  per  cent,  hydrochloric  acid  solution  and  a  4  per  cent, 
potassium  ferrocyanid  solution.     In  the  presence  of  ferric 
salts  an  intense  blue  color  is  formed. 

7.  In  order  to  stain  the  higher  forms  of  iron  bacteria 
it  is  well  to  remove  the  deposit  of  iron  by  treating  with  a 
5  per  cent,  hydrochloric  acid  solution. 

Exercise   2 
Iron  Precipitating  Bacteria 

1.  Shake  20  grams  of  field  soil  with  200  c.c.  of  water. 
Dilute  until  i  c.c.  equals  i  :  100,000. 

2.  Pour  plates  with  medium  64. 

3.  Incubate  the  plates  for  several  weeks  at  28°  C. 

4.  Note   the  precipitation  of  iron  compounds  around 
certain  colonies. 

84 


jrig>  g.— Iron  bacteria:  A,  Crenothrix  thread  showing  germination  of 
spores  within  sheath;  X  850.  B,  Chlamydothrix  showing  simple  and 
curved  threads;  X  850. 

85 


Fig.  9. — Iron  bacteria:    A,  Gallionella,  Chlamydothrix,  and  Spirophyllum ; 

X  850.    B,  Spirophyllum;  X  850. 
86 


SECTION  VI 

RELATION  OF  MICROORGANISMS  TO   THE  PHYSICAL 
PROPERTIES   OF  SOIL 

Exercise   i 
Movements  of  Soil  Water 

1.  PREPARE  four  glass  cylinders  or  large  test-tubes  as 
follows:   Fill  two  three-fourths  full  of  quartz  sand  and 
two  three-fourths  full  of  soil. 

2.  Treat  as  follows: 

(a)  Sand  plus  i  per  cent,  of  sugar  bouillon  previously  inoculated  with 

5  c.c.  of  a  rich  soil  suspension. 
(6)  Sand  plus  i  per  cent,  of  sugar  bouillon  previously  inoculated  with 

5  c.c.  of  a  rich  soil  suspension. 

(c)  Soil  plus  i  per  cent,  sugar. 

(d)  Soil  plus  i  per  cent,  sugar. 

3.  Add  enough  bouillon  to  the  sand  and  enough  water  to 
the  soil  to  completely  saturate  the  columns. 

4.  In  order  to  prevent  bacterial  growth  add  5  c.c.  of 
a  i  :  5  mercuric  chlorid  solution  to  cylinders  (a)  and  (c), 
and  the  same  amount  of  water  to  cylinders  (b)  and  (d). 

5.  Mark  on  the  cylinders  the  height  of  the  column  of 
water. 

6.  Incubate  at  28°  C.,  and  examine  each  day. 


FORMULAE  AND   METHODS 

CLEANING  GLASSWARE 

1.  ALL  glassware  must  be  thoroughly  cleaned  before  it 
is  ready  to  use.    Test-tubes,  Petri  dishes,  flasks,  and  similar 
glassware  should  be  boiled  in  a  5  per  cent,  soda  solution 
or  washed  in  hot  soapsuds  until  free  from  organic  matter. 
When  it  is  desirable  to  use  very  clean  glassware,  immerse 
for  ten  minutes  or  longer  if  possible  in  the  dichromate 
solution. 

Potassium  (K2Cr2O7)  or  sodium  dichromate  (Na2Cr2O7) ...     80  gm. 

Water 300  c.c. 

Sulphuric  acid  (H2SO4) 460  c.c. 

Note. — Dissolve  the  dichromate  in  warm  water  and,  when  cool,  add 
slowly  concentrated  sulphuric  acid.  If  properly  prepared,  the  liquid  should 
be  thick,  with  small  crystals.  It  may  be  used  repeatedly,  provided  the 
crystals 'are  present. 

2.  After    removing    from    the    cleaning    solution    rinse 
thoroughly  in  distilled  water. 

3.  Dirty  cover-glasses  and  slides  may  be  treated  in  the 
same  manner.     Drop  these,  one  at  a  time,  into  the  dichro- 
mate mixture  and  allow  to  remain  for  several  hours.     Re- 
move from  this  solution,  wash,  and  wipe  with  a  soft,  clean 
cloth. 

4.  A  simple  and  more  rapid  method,  suitable  for  general 
work,  is  to  rub  the  slides  with  moist  Bon  Ami,  and  when 
dry  to  polish  them  with  a  clean  cloth. 

5.  In  order  to  remove  fat  pass  the  cover-slips  through  a 
flame.     Where  it  is  desirable  to  have  very  clean  slides  and 

88 


BOUILLON   OR   NUTRIENT   BROTH  89 

cover-slips  it  is  well  to  heat  them  in  water  and  then  in  50 
per  cent,  sulphuric  acid.  After  rinsing  in  distilled  water, 
wash  in  alcohol  and  wipe  with  a  clean  cloth.  These  should 
be  kept  in  a  clean,  covered  dish. 


SECTION  VII 

PREPARATION  OF  CULTURE-MEDIA 

The  culture-media  are  arranged  according  to  the  groups 
of  soil  microorganisms.  Since  it  is  not  possible  to  grow  all 
of  the  strains  of  bacteria  in  one  group  on  the  same  medium, 
several  formulae  are  given. 

MEDIA  FOR  THE  DETERMINATION  OF  THE  NUMBER  AND  FOR 
THE   SEPARATION  OF   SOIL  BACTERIA 

Medium   i 

Bouillon  or  Nutrient  Broth 

Peptone 10  gm. 

Liebig's  meat  extract 3  gm. 

Distilled  water 1000  c.c. 

1.  Add  to  i  liter  of  distilled  water  3  grams  of  meat 
extract  and  10  grams  of  peptone. 

2.  Record  the  weight  of  vessel  and  contents. 

3.  Heat  not  above  50°  C.  in  steamer  or  double  boiler  until 
extract  and  peptone  are  dissolved. 

4.  Titrate  and  adjust  reaction  to  i  per  cent,  acid,  with 
phenolphthalein  as  an  indicator  (+i). 

5.  Boil  over  the  free  flame  for  fifteen  minutes. 

6.  Restore  the  loss  in  weight  with  distilled  water. 
'     7.  Titrate  again. 


QO  SOIL  BACTERIOLOGY 

8.  Sterilize  broth  in  large  flask  and  allow  to  stand  until 
next  laboratory  period. 

9.  Refilter  through  fine  paper  and  tube. 

10.  Fill  tubes  about  one-third  full. 

11.  Plug  the  tubes  and  sterilize  in  autoclave  at  120°  C. 
for  fifteen  minutes. 

Note. — To  titrate,  remove  5  c.c.  of  the  medium  to  a  casserole  or  small 
flask  containing  about  45  c.c.  of  distilled  water.  Boil  one  minute  with 
constant  stirring,  add  3  drops  phenolphthalein,  and  neutralize  excess  acid 
with  N/20  NaOH.  If  i  c.c.  N/20  NaOH  is  required  to  neutralize  5  c.c. 
of  the  medium,  the  reaction  is  correct.  In  this  way  calculate  the  amount 
of  normal  alkali  or  acid  necessary  to  adjust  the  reaction  of  the  entire  bulk 
of  culture-medium  to  i  per  cent.  (+i). 

All  reactions  must  be  expressed  with  reference  to  the  phenolphthalein 
neutral  point.  They  are  stated  in  percentages  of  normal  acid  or  alkaline 
solutions  required  to  neutralize  them  (Fuller's  scale).  Alkaline  media 
should  be  recorded  with  the  minus  sign  ( — )  before  the  percentage  of  normal 
acid  needed  for  their  neutralization;  acid  media  should  be  written  with  the 
plus  sign  (+)  before  the  percentage  of  normal  alkaline  solution  necessary 
for  their  neutralization. 

The  example  below  will  illustrate  the  method.  If  the  required  reaction 
is  (+1)  and  the  buret  reading  shows  that  i.S  c.c.  of  N/20  NaOH  has  been 
used  in  neutralizing  the  5  c.c.  of  broth,  then  the  problem  may  be  stated  as 
follows: 

5  c.c.  of  broth  require  the  addition  of  1.8  c.c.  N/20  NaOH  to  neutralize 
it. 

100  c.c.  of  broth  require  the  addition  of  36  c.c.  N/2O  NaOH  or  1.8  c.c. 

N/i  NaOH  to  neutralize  it. 

looo  c.c.  of  broth  require  the  addition  of  18  c.c.  N/i  NaOH  to  neutralize 
it. 

The  figures  above  show  that  the  broth  as  titrated  is  0.8  per  cent,  too 
acid,  and  that  8  c.c.  of  normal  NaOH  per  liter  must  be  added  to  obtain  the 
proper  reaction. 

Do  not  neutralize  medium  first  and  then  readjust  by  the  addition  of  acid. 
This  tends  to  precipitate  certain  substances  which  are  favorable  to  bac- 
terial development. 

The  broth  prepared  in  this  way  should  be  of  a  golden  color  and 
should  not  develop  a  precipitate  upon  subsequent  sterilization  in  the 
autoclave.  Adjust  reaction  by  adding  normal  hydrochloric  acid  or 
sodium  hydroxid. 


NUTRIENT    GELATIN  9 1 

The  hydrogen  electrode  may  be  used  to  determine  the  reaction  of  culture- 
media. 

Fuller,  G.  W.,  Jour.  Pub.  Health  Assoc.,  vol.  xx,  pp.  381-399,  1895. 
Standard  Methods  of  Water  Analysis,  1915. 
Clark,  W.  M.,  Jour.  Inf.  Diseases,  vol.  xvii,  pp.  109-136,  1915. 
Anthony  and  Ekroth,  Jour.  Bact.,  vol.  i,  pp.  230-232,  1916. 
Itano,  A.,  Bui.  167,  Mass.  Agr.  Exp.  Sta.,  1916. 

12.  Titration  of  Broth. — Titrate  the  two  samples  of 
broth  prepared  by  the  instructor.  Determine  the  amount 
of  N/i  alkali  or  acid  required  to  make  i  liter  of  these 
solutions  (+i).  Do  this  for  each  sample.  Titrate  sample 
No.  2,  hot  and  cold,  using  phenolphthalein  and  litmus  as 
indicators.  Record  results. 


Medium  2 
Nutrient  Gelatin 

Gelatin 100  to  150  gm. 

Liebig's  meat  extract 3  gm. 

Peptone 10  gm. 

Distilled  water 1000  c.c. 

1.  In  a  convenient  vessel  measure  1000  c.c.  of  nutrient 
broth. 

2.  Add  10  per  cent.,  on  the  dry  basis,  of  gold  label  sheet 
gelatin.    Let  the  gelatin  soak  five  to  ten  minutes. 

3.  Heat  over  water-bath  until  dissolved. 

4.  Adjust  the  reaction  as  directed  in  the  preparation  of 
nutrient  broth.     Gelatin  is  decidedly  acid  and  will  require 
more  NaOH  to  neutralize  it  than  bouillon  or  agar. 

5.  Cool  this  mass  to  about  60°  C.     Add  the  whites  of 
two  eggs  or  3  grams  of  powdered  egg-albumen  to  25  c.c. 
of  water.    Stir  into  the  gelatin  and  heat  in  a  double  boiler. 
The  egg-albumen  will  coagulate  and  inclose  most  of  the 


92  SOIL  BACTERIOLOGY 

impurities.     When  this  coagulum  has  settled  to  the  bottom, 
pour  the  cleared  gelatin  through  the  filter. 

6.  If  properly  prepared,  gelatin  may  be  filtered  through 
filter-paper.     Otherwise  it  will  be  necessary  to  use  an  ab- 
sorbent cotton  filter. 

Note. — A  cotton  filter  is  prepared  as  follows:  In  the  base  of  a  large  funnel 
place  a  small  amount  of  clean  excelsior.  In  place  of  the  excelsior  a  small 
spiral  of  copper  wire  may  be  used.  On  top  of  this  put  two  or  three  layers  of 
absorbent  cotton.  Split  a  piece  of  absorbent  cotton,  somewhat  larger 
than  the  top  of  the  funnel,  horizontally  into  two  layers  of  equal  thickness. 
Place  one  layer  of  cotton  above  the  other,  so  that  the  fibers  are  at  right 
angles.  Pour  the  medium,  slowly  at  first,  on  to  the  filter.  (In  order  to 
avoid  breaking  the  filter  use  a  glass  rod  to  direct  the  fluid  to  the  center  of 
the  filter.)  When  the  filtrate  begins  to  come  through  the  cotton,  fill  the 
funnel.  If  the  first  filtrate  is  not  clear,  the  turbid  liquid  should  be  refiltered 
through  the  same  cotton. 

7.  Sterilize  in  the  autoclave  for  ten  minutes  at  120°  C. 

8.  As  soon  as  removed  from  the  autoclave  stand  in  cold 
or  ice-water.     Gelatin  is  easily  decomposed,  and  if  heated, 
too  high  or  too  long  will  not  solidify. 

Medium  3 

Nutrient  Agar 

Agar 15  gm. 

Liebig's  meat  extract 3  gm. 

Peptone 10  gm. 

Distilled  water 1000  c.c. 

1.  In  a  vessel  containing  1000  c.c.  of  water  add  15  grams 
of  thread  agar. 

2.  Heat  in  the  steamer  or  double  boiler  until  the  agar  is 
dissolved.     This  requires  at  least  one  hour. 

3.  Add  3  grams  extract  of  meat  and  10  grams  of  peptone. 


HEYDEN-NAHRSTOFF    AGAR  93 

4.  When  completely   dissolved   adjust  the   reaction   to 


5.  Clear  with  egg-albumen  and  filter  as  directed  under 
the  preparation  of  gelatin. 

6.  Tube,  and  sterilize  in  the  autoclave  for  fifteen  minutes. 
The  amount  of  agar  to  place  in  tubes  will  depend  on  the 
purpose  for  which  the  agar  is  to  be  used.     For  slants, 
about  5  c.c.  is  enough;  for  plates,  about  10  c.c. 

Note.  —  For  making  especially  clear  agar,  adjust  the  reaction  to  (+1.5) 
with  N/i  HC1  before  adding  the  agg-albumen.  Heat  in  the  steamer  until 
the  albumen  is  coagulated  and  settled  to  the  bottom  of  the  dish.  If  it  will 
not  settle,  stir  the  agar  vigorously  and  continue  heating.  It  may  be  three 
or  four  hours  before  it  is  ready  to  be  filtered.  Filtering  then  consists  only 
in  decanting  the  cleared  agar  through  either  a  cotton  filter  or  filter-paper. 
Do  not  pour  the  dirt  and  albumen  on  to  the  filter.  Titrate  and  adjust  the 
reaction  to  (+i). 

Medium  4 
Heyden-Nahrstoff  Agar 

Agar  ........................................       1  2.0  gin. 

Heyden-Nahrstoff  .............................         7.5  gm. 

Distilled  water  ...........  ....................   1000.0  c.c. 

1.  To  500  c.c.  of  cold  distilled  water  in  a  flask  add  7.5 
grams  of  Heyden-Nahrstoff.     Shake  until  a  good  suspension 
is  obtained  and  allow  the  mixture  to  stand  for  thirty  minutes 
or  more. 

2.  Heat  in  steamer  or  double  boiler  for  one  hour,  or 
until  the  upper  portion  of  the  solution  is  clear. 

3.  While  hot  filter  through  paper. 

4.  Dissolve  1  2  grams  of  agar  in  500  c.c.  of  water.     Filter 
and  mix  the  Heyden-Nahrstoff  and  agar  solutions. 

5.  It  is  not  necessary  to  adjust  the  reaction  of  this  medium. 

Heyden-Nahrstoff,  The  Heyden  Chemical  Works,  135  Williams  St., 
New  York  City,  N.  Yt 


94  SOIL   BACTERIOLOGY 

Medium   5 
Casein  Agar 

Agar 10  gm. 

Casein 10  gm. 

Sodium  hydroxid  N/i  (NaOH) 7  c.c. 

Distilled  water 1000  c.c. 

1.  Measure  into  an  Erlenmeyer  flask  100  c.c.  of  distilled 
water  and  10  grams  of  casein  (Hammarsten) . 

2.  Add  to  this  7  c.c.  of  normal  NaOH. 

3.  Heat  in  a  double  boiler  or  steamer  to  get  a  perfect 
solution. 

4.  Dissolve  10  grams  of  agar  in  900  c.c.  of  distilled  water. 

5.  Mix  and  filter  the  casein-agar  solution. 

6.  Adjust  the  reaction  between  (+0.1)  and  (+0.2)  per 
cent.    If  the  casein  is  weighed  accurately  and  the  normal 
solution  is  correct,  the  reaction  will  be  about  (+0.2). 

7.  Tube,  and  sterilize  in  autoclave  for  fifteen  minutes. 
Cool  quickly  in  cold  or  iced  water. 

Note. — The  final  reaction  of  the  medium  will  be  about  (+0.1),  Fuller's 
scale.  If  the  medium  is  alkaline,  the  bacterial  growth  will  be  restricted. 
If  the  medium  is  more  than  (+0.1)  some  of  the  casein  may  be  precipitated 
during  sterilization.  The  casein  agar  should  be  clear  and  almost  colorless 
when  poured  into  a  Petri  dish.  Sometimes  the  casein  will  be  slightly  pre- 
cipitated during  the  sterilization  or  the  cooling.  This  is  of  no  consequence, 
since  the  precipitate,  when  poured  into  plates,  is  so  finely  divided  that  it 
becomes  invisible.  Casein  agar  should  be  incubated  for  six  days  at  30°  C. 

Ayres,  S.  H.,  United  States  Dept.  Agr.  Bur.  Animal  Indus.,  28th  Ann. 
Report,  pp.  225-235,  1911. 

Medium  6 

Soil- extract  Agar 

Agar 15  gm. 

Dextrose  (C6Hi2O6) i  gm. 

Soil  extract 100  c.c. 

Water 900  c.c. 


ASPARAGIN-DEXTROSE   AGAR  FOR   SOIL   BACTERIA       95 

1.  Dissolve  the  agar  in.  900  c.c.  of  water  by  heating  in 
the  steamer  for  one  hour  or  longer.     Add  100  c.c.  of  the 
stock  soil-extract  solution. 

2.  Add  the  dextrose  just  prior  to  tubing. 

3.  The  reaction  should  be  (+0.5)  or  nearly  neutral. 

Note. — Stock  Solution  of  Soil  Extract. — This  is  prepared  by  heating  1000 
grams  of  garden  soil  with  1000  c.c.  of  tap- water  in  the  autoclave  at  5  to  10 
pounds'  pressure  for  thirty  minutes.  A  small  amount  of  calcium  carbonate 
is  added  and  the  whole  is  filtered  through  a  double  paper  filter.  The  turbid 
filtrate  should  be  poured  back  on  to  the  filter  until  it  comes  through  clear. 

Medium  7 
Soil-extract  Gelatin 

Gelatin 100  to  150  gm. 

Dextrose  (C6Hi2O6) i  gm. 

Soil  extract 100  c.c. 

Water 900  c.c. 

1.  Dissolve  the  gelatin  in  the  diluted  soil-extract  solution 
by  heating  slowly  in  the  steamer. 

2.  Clarify  the  medium  with  egg-albumen. 

3.  Add  i  gram  of  dextrose  and  adjust  the  reaction  to 

(+0.5). 

Conn,  H.  J.,  Bui.  38,  N.  Y.  Agr.  Exp.  Sta.,  1914. 


Medium  8 
Asparagin-dextrose  Agar  for  Soil  Bacteria 

Agar 15.0  gm. 

Dibasic  potassium  phosphate  (K2HPO4) 0.5  gm. 

Magnesium  sulphate  (MgSO4  +  yH2O) 0.2  gm. 

Asparagin  (C4H8N2O3  +  H2O) i.o  gm. 

Dextrose  (C6H12O6) i.o  gm. 

Distilled  water .  1000.0  c.c. 


96  SOIL  BACTERIOLOGY 

1.  After  dissolving  the  agar  by  steaming  for  one  hour  or 
more,  add  the  dibasic  potassium  phosphate  and  magnesium 
sulphate. 

2.  The  asparagin  and  dextrose  should  be  added  just 
before  sterilizing. 

3.  Adjust  the  reaction  to  (+1.0). 

Medium  9 
Urea-ammonium   Nitrate   Agar   for   Soil   Bacteria 

Agar 15.0    gm. 

Dibasic  potassium  phosphate  (K2HPO4) 0.5    gm. 

Magnesium  sulphate  (MgSO4  +  7H2O) 0.2    gm. 

Dextrose  (C6Hi2O6) 10.0    gm. 

Urea  (CO(NH2)2) 0.05  gm. 

Ammonium  nitrate  (NHUNOs) o.i    gm. 

Ferric  sulphate  (Fe2(SO4)3) •  trace 

Distilled  water 1000.0    c.c. 

The  urea,  ammonium  nitrate,  and  dextrose  should  not  be 
added  until  the  medium  is  ready  for  sterilization.  The 
reaction  should  be  about  (+0.25). 

Cook,  R.  C.,  Soil  Science,  vol.  i,  No.  2,  pp.  153-161,  1916. 

Medium   10 
Sodium  Asparaginate  Agar  for  Soil  Bacteria 

Agar 1 2.0  gm. 

Ammonium  biphosphate  (NH4)H2PO4 1.5  gm. 

Magnesium  sulphate  (MgSO4  +  yH2O) 0.2  gm. 

Sodium  asparaginate  (NaC4H6NO4  -f-  H2O) i.o  gm. 

Dextrose  (CeH^Oe) i.o  gm. 

Calcium  chlorid  (CaCl2) o.i  gm. 

Potassium  chlorid  (KC1) o.i  gm. 

Ferric  chlorid  (FeCla  +  6H2O) trace 

Distilled  water 1000.0  c.c. 

The  sodium  asparaginate  and  dextrose  should  not  be  added 
until  the  medium  is  ready  for  sterilization.  The  reaction 


SOIL   EXTRACT    (FLAGELLATES   AND    CILIATES)  97 

should  be  between  (+0.8  or  +1.0).  It  requires  about 
10  c.c.  of  N/i  NaOH  per  liter.  In  place  of  clarifying  with 
the  white  of  egg,  the  author  recommends  heating  for  half 
an  hour  at  15  pounds'  pressure  without  disturbing  the  sedi- 
ment and  decanting  through  a  cotton  filter. 

Conn,  H.  J.,  Bui.  38,  New  York  Agr.  Exp.  Sta.,  1914. 


COUNTING   SOIL  PROTOZOA 

Medium   n 
Hay-soil  Extract 

Soil  extract 100  c.c. 

Hay  extract  (o.i  per  cent,  of  dry  hay) 100  c.c. 

Calcium  carbonate  (CaCO3) 5  gm. 

Tap-water 800  c.c. 

Medium   12 
Hay  Infusion 

Hay 10  gm. 

Tap-water 1000  c.c. 

Medium   13 
Hay  Egg-albumen  (Ciliates) 

Hay 100  gm. 

Egg-albumen 50  gm. 

Tap-water 1000  c.c. 

Medium   14 
Soil  Extract  (Flagellates  and  Ciliates) 

Soil  extract 100.0  c.c. 

Dibasic  potassium  phosphate  (K^HPC^) 0.5  gm. 

Tap-water 900.0  c.c. 

7 


98  SOIL  BACTERIOLOGY 

Medium   15 
Mannit  Solution 
See  Culture-medium  No.  39,  page  108. 

AMMONIFICATION 

Medium   16 

Peptone  Solution 

Peptone 10  gm. 

Distilled  water 1000  c.c. 

Heat  in  the  autoclave  for  thirty  minutes  and  filter. 

Medium   17 
Gelatin  Solution 

Gelatin 5  gm. 

Distilled  water. 1000  c.c. 

Bring  the  reaction  to  (+1.0). 

Medium   18 

Casein  Solution 

Casein 10  gm. 

Normal  sodium  hydroxid  (NaOH) 7  c.c. 

Distilled  water 1000  c.c. 

Prepare  according  to  directions  on  page  94. 

Medium   19 
Urea  Solution 

Urea  (CO(NH2)2) 20  gm. 

Bouillon  ( — i.o) looo  c.c. 


UREA    GELATIN  99 

1.  Heat  in  the  steamer  or  over  a  free  flame  until  the 
precipitate  settles. 

2.  Filter  and  sterilize. 

3.  In  order  to  diminish  the  loss  of  ammonia  from  urea 
the  culture-media  should    be    sterilized    in  the  steamer 
twenty  minutes  on  three  successive  days. 

Medium  20 
Urea  Solution 

Certain  forms  of  urea  fermenters  prefer  a  medium  richer 
in  urea.  This  may  be  prepared  by  adding  10  per  cent,  of 
urea  to  the  bouillon. 

Medium  21 

Urea  Solution 

Urea  (CO(NH2)2) 30.0  gm. 

Dibasic  potassium  phosphate  (K2HPO4). 0.5  gm. 

Calcium  citrate  (Ca3(C6H5O7)2  +  4H2O) 10.0  gm. 

Tap-water 1000.0  c.c. 

Sohngen,  N.  L.,  Centbl.  Bakt.  (etc.),  Abt.  2,  Bd.  23,  p.  94,  1909. 

Medium  22 

Urea  Solution 

Urea  (CO(NH2)2) 50.0  gm. 

Dibasic  potassium  phosphate  (K2HPO4) 0.5  gm. 

Soil  extract 100.0  c.c. 

Tap-water 900.0  c.c. 

Lohnis,  F.,  Centbl.  Bakt.  (etc.),  Abt.  2,  Bd.  14,  p.  714,  1905. 

Medium  23 
Urea  Gelatin 

Gelatin 120  to  150  gm. 

Urea  (CO(NH2)2) 20  c.c. 

Bouillon  ( — i.o) 1000  c.c. 


100  SOIL  BACTERIOLOGY 

The  urea  decreases  the  solidifying  properties  of  gelatin. 
If  agar  medium  is  wanted,  take  15  grams  to  i  liter. 

Medium  24 
Hippuric  Acid  Solution 

Sodium  hippurate  (NaC9H8NO3) 3.0  gm. 

Dibasic  potassium  phosphate  (K2HPO4) 0.5  gm. 

Tap-water 1000.0  c.c. 

Medium  25 
Uric  Acid  Solution 

Uric  acid  (C5H4N4O3) 3.0  gm. 

Dibasic  potassium  phosphate  (K2HPO4) 0.5  gm. 

Tap-water 1000.0  c.c. 

Lohnis,  F.,  Landwirtschaftliche-bakteriologisches  Praktikum,  Berlin,  pp. 
112,  113,  1911. 

NITRIFICATION 

Medium  26 
Solution  for  Nitrite  Formation 

Ammonium  sulphate  (NH4)2SO4 i.o  gm. 

Dibasic  potassium  phosphate  (K2HPO4) i.o  gm. 

Magnesium  sulphate  (MgSO4  +  yH^O) 0.5  gm. 

Sodium  chlorid  (NaCl) 2.0  gm. 

Ferrous  sulphate  (FeSO4  +  7H2O) 0.4  gm. 

Magnesium  carbonate  (MgCOs)  in  excess about  5.0  gm. 

Distilled  water 1000.0  c.c. 

In  order  to  prevent  any  loss  of  ammonia,  it  is  well  to  sterilize 
the  ammonium  sulphate  separately.  A  10  per  cent,  solu- 
tion will  be  found  very  convenient.  When  cool,  the  proper 
amount  of  ammonium  sulphate  may  be  added  with  a 
sterile  pipet. 

Winogradsky,  Lafar,  Technische  Mykologie,  Bd.  3,  pp.  132-181,  1904. 


SOLUTION   FOR   NITRITE 

Medium  27 
Solution  for  Nitrite  Formation 

Magnesium  ammonium  phosphate  (Mg(NH4)PO4 

+  6H2O) 2.0  gm. 

Dibasic  potassium  phosphate  (KaHPO^ 0.5  gm. 

Magnesium  sulphate  (MgSO4  +  7H2O) 0.5  gm. 

Sodium  chlorid  (NaCl) i.o  gm. 

Ferrous  sulphate  (FeSO4  +  7H2O) 0.4  gm. 

Magnesium  carbonate  (MgCO3) 5-°  gm- 

Distilled  water 1000.0  c.c. 

It  is  not  necessary  to  sterilize  the  magnesium  ammonium 
phosphate  separately. 

Medium  28 
Solution  for  Nitrate  Formation 

Sodium  nitrite  (NaNO2) i.o  gm. 

Dibasic  potassium  phosphate  (K2HPO4) 0.5  gm. 

Magnesium  sulphate  (MgSC>4  +  7H2O) 0.3  gm. 

Sodium  chlorid  (NaCl) 0.5  gm. 

Ferrous  sulphate  (FeSO4  +  yH2O) 0.4  gm. 

Sodium  carbonate  (Na2CO3)  (anhydrous) 0.3  gm. 

Distilled  water : IOOG.O  c.c. 

The  formation  of  nitrates  takes  place  rapidly,  provided 
the  cultures  are  grown  under  conditions  that  supply  an 
abundance  of  oxygen. 

Medium  29 
Solution  for  Nitrite  and  Nitrate  Formation 

Ammonium  sulphate  (NH4)2SO4 2.0  gm. 

Dibasic  potassium  phosphate  (K2HPC>4) i.o  gm. 

Magnesium  sulphate  (MgSC>4  +  ?H2O) 0.5  gm. 

Sodium  chlorid  (NaCl) 2.0  gm. 

Ferrous  sulphate  (FeSO4  +  yH2O) 0.4  gm. 

Calcium  carbonate  (CaCOs) 5.0  gm. 

Distilled  water.  .  .    1000.0  c.c. 


102  SVOIL   BACTERIOLOGY 

The  ammonium  sulphate  or  the  calcium  carbonate  should 
be  sterilized  separately  and  added  after  cooling.  In  place 
of  2  grams  of  ammonium  sulphate,  7.4  grams  of  magnesium 
ammonium  phosphate  may  be  used.  This  solution  is 
suited  to  a  quantitative  study  of  nitrification. 


Medium  30 
Silicate  Jelly  for  the  Nitrifying  Bacteria 

A.    Undialyzed 

1.  Prepare  a  solution  of  sodium  silicate  (Na2Si03)   of 
approximately  8  per  cent.     Weigh  out  the  sodium  silicate 
and  boil  in  water  for  thirty  minutes,  filter  through  cotton 
and  coarse  grained  filter-paper.     It  is  more  convenient  to 
use  Merck's  concentrated  solution  of  sodium  silicate  and 
dilute  to  the  desired  strength.    This  must  be  kept  tightly 
stoppered. 

2.  Prepare  a  solution  of  hydrochloric  acid  (HC1)  of  such 
a  strength  that  i  c.c.  of  the  acid  neutralizes  i  c.c.  of  the 
sodium  silicate,  using  methyl-orange   as  an  indicator;  or 
use  normal  hydrochloric  acid  and  determine  the  amount  of 
sodium  silicate  required  to  neutralize  the  acid. 

3.  To  1 20  c.c.  of  the  hydrochloric  acid  solution  add,  with 
stirring,  100  c.c.  of  the  sodium  silicate  solution.     If  normal 
acid  is  used,  be  sure  there  is  20  c.c.  excess  of  acid  in  each 
220  c.c.  of  the  mixture. 

4.  Tube  i2-c.c.  portions  of  the  mixture  and  sterilize  in 
the  autoclave  for  ten  minutes  at  15  pounds'  pressure.     If 
the  tubes  are  sealed  tightly  this  mixture  may  be  kept  for 
several  weeks.     In  case  the  mixture  becomes  a  milky  color 
or  solid  when  taken  from  the  autoclave,  it  indicates  an 


SILICATE    JELLY    FOR    THE    NITRIFYING    BACTERIA      103 

insufficient    quantity    of    hydrochloric    acid    was    added. 
Repeat,  using  more  acid. 

5.  Prepare    a    solution    containing    the    nutrient    salts 
suitable  for  the  growth  of  the  desired  organism.     This 
solution  should  contain  the  salts  in  from  2.5  to  5  times  the 
desired  strength. 

6.  Tube  and  sterilize  the  nutrient  solution.     If  5  times 
normal  strength  is  taken,  use  about  3  c.c.  per  tube,  or  5  c.c. 
if  2.5  times  normal  strength. 

7.  Pour  the  silicic  acid  mixture  into  a  sterile  Petri  dish. 
Inoculate  the  sterile  nutrient  solution  and  add  a  sufficient 
amount  of  a  sodium  carbonate  solution  to  neutralize  the 
excess  silicic  acid  in  the  mixture  and  a  few  drops,  in  excess. 
Now  pour  this  into  the  dish  with  the  silicic  acid,  rotate, 
and  allow  the  plate  to  harden  on  an  even  surface.    After 
a  few  moments  this  mixture  should  harden.     The  plates 
may  be  handled  similar  to  agar  plates.     The  concentration 
of  silicic  acid  mixtures  determines  the  strength  of  the 
nutrient  solution  to  use. 

A  modification  of  the  Stevens  and  Temple  method,  Centbl.  Bakt.  (etc.), 
Abt.  2,  Bd.  21,  pp.  84-87,  1908. 

B.    Undialyzed 

1.  Dissolve  8.40  grams  of  sodium  silicate  (Na2SiO3)  and 
24  grams  of  potassium  silicate   (K2Si03)   in  500  c.c.   of 
distilled    water.     A    mixture    of    sodium    and    potassium 
silicate  decreases  the  sodium  salt  in  the  final  medium. 

2.  Prepare  dilute  hydrochloric  acid  in  such  a  way  that  it 
requires  slightly  more  than  i  c.c.  of  the  sodium  potassium 
silicate  solution  to  neutralize  i  c.c.  of  the  HC1. 

3.  Add  to  the  hydrochloric  acid  solution  the  nutrient 
salts  suitable  for  the  growth  of  the  nitrifying  bacteria. 

4.  With  methyl-orange  as  an  indicator,  standardize  the 


104  SOIL  BACTERIOLOGY 

hydrochloric  acid  mixture  against  the  silicate  so  that  i  c.c. 
equals  i  c.c. 

5.  In  a  similar  manner  standardize  a  solution  of  sulphuric 
acid  and  phosphoric  acid  without  the  salts. 

6.  The  three  acids  should  then  be  mixed.      Approxi- 
mately, i  c.c.  of  the  acid  mixture  will  neutralize  i  c.c.  of 
the  silicate  mixture. 

Doryland,  C.  J.  T.,  Jour,  of  Bact.,  vol.  i,  No.  2,  pp.  143-148,  1916. 

C.  Partially  Dialyzed 

1.  Make  a  solution  of  sodium  silicate  as  in  the  undialyzed 
procedure. 

2.  Mix  with  approximately  normal  hydrochloric  acid, 
making  the  mixture  decidedly  acid. 

3.  Dialyze  in  running  water,  using  parchment,  animal 
membrane,  or  collodion  sacs  until  nearly  all   the  chlorids 
have  disappeared.     Make   sure   all  the   chlorids  do  not 
dialyze  out,  or  the  mass  will  solidify. 

Note. — Collodion  is  conveniently  prepared  by  dissolving  soluble  gun- 
cotton  in  a  mixture  of  equal  parts  of  95  per  cent,  alcohol  and  sulphuric  ether. 
Take  about  5  grams  of  clean,  white  guncotton  per  100  c.c.  of  fluid.  It 
requires  at  least  twenty-four  hours  to  completely  dissolve  the  guncotton. 

Pour  the  collodion  slowly  into  clean  test-tubes  and  rotate.  Try  to 
moisten  the  interior  of  the  tube  without  forming  air  bubbles.  The  ex- 
cess of  collodion  should  be  poured  back  into  the  bottle  and  the  tube  slowly 
rotated  in  order  to  keep  the  interior  of  the  tube  covered  with  a  uniform 
layer.  After  pouring  off  the  excess,  stand  the  tube  upright,  mouth  down, 
on  a  sheet  of  clean  paper  to  drain.  Wipe  off  the  excess  of  collodion  from 
about  the  mouth  of  the  tube.  Now  rotate  the  tube  for  five  minutes  or 
more  with  the  mouth  in  a  draft.  When  dry,  remove  the  sac  by  cutting 
around  mouth  of  tube  and  filling  with  water.  Allow  the  collodion  sacs  to 
stand  in  water  until  ready  to  use. 

Fill  the  sacs  with  the  acid  sodium  silicate  and  tie  the  mouth  with  rubber 
bands.  When  dialyzed,  pour  the  silicate  jelly  out  of  the  collodion  sacs 
into  a  clean  beaker  and  boil  for  one  or  two  minutes  over  an  open  flame. 
This  should  remove  the  absorbed  air. 


MAGNESIUM-GYPSUM   BLOCKS  105 

4.  Make   the  mixture    10  per   cent,   acid  with   strong 
hydrochloric  acid. 

5.  Tube  and  sterilize  as  before,  and  proceed  as  with  the 
undialyzed  media. 

6.  In  case  the  silicic  acid  does  not  solidify,  the  dialyzed 
solution  may  be  concentrated. 

Medium  31 
Washed  Agar  for  the  Nitrifying  Bacteria 

1.  Heat  ordinary  agar  with  distilled  water  until  in  solu- 
tion. 

2.  Pour  into  Erlenmeyer  flasks  and  allow  to  solidify. 

3.  After  standing  for  one  or  two  weeks  with  several 
changes  of  water,  all  the  soluble  organic  substances  will 
have  been  removed. 

4.  Add  the  inorganic  substances  and  sterilize.     It  is  well 
to  use  precipitated  calcium  carbonate  and  hydrogen  am- 
monium sodium  phosphate  (NH4NaHP04  +  4H20). 

Medium  32 

Magnesium-gypsum  Blocks 

1.  Add  i  per  cent,  of  magnesium  carbonate  (MgC03)  to 
dried  gypsum  (CaS04  +  H2O)  and  mix  thoroughly. 

2.  To  this  mass  add  water  until  the  mixture  has  the 
consistency  of  sour  cream. 

3.  Pour  upon  plate  glass  and  cut  into  circular  blocks  for 
Petri  dishes.     It  is  best  to  cut  with  a  Petri  dish  of  a  size 
smaller  than  the  dish  for  which  it  is  intended.     If  the 
glass  plate  or  Petri  dish  is  previously  washed  in  soapy 
water,  the  gypsum  block  is  readily  removed. 

4.  When  hard,  remove  blocks  from  glass,  place  bottom 


106  SOIL  BACTERIOLOGY 

up  in  dishes,  and  add  enough  culture-media  to  half  cover 
blocks. 

5.  Inoculate  the  surface  of  blocks  and  incubate  at  25° 
to  30°  C. 

DENITRIFICATION 

Medium  33 
Solution  for  Nitrate  Reduction 

(a)  Potassium  nitrate  (KNO3) i  gm. 

Asparagin  (C^s^Os  +  H2O) i  gm. 

Water 250  c.c. 

(&)  Citric  acid  (C6H8O7  +  H2O) 5.0  gm. 

or  Neutral  sodium  citrate 8.5  gm. 

Monobasic  potassium  phosphate  (KH2PO4)..  .  .  i.o  gm. 

Magnesium  sulphate  (MgSO4  +  7H2O) i.o  gm. 

Calcium  chlorid  (CaCl2  +  6  H2O) .  0.2  gm. 

Ferric  chlorid  (FeCl3  +  6H2O) trace 

Distilled  water 250.0  c.c. 

Neutralize  the  citric  acid  solution  with  a  10  per  cent, 
solution  of  sodium  or  potassium  hydroxid,  using  phenol- 
phthalein  as  an  indicator.  Mix  the  two  solutions,  cool  to 
15°  C.,  and  add  sufficient  water  to  make  i  liter.  If  the 
asparagin  and  potassium  nitrate  are  dissolved  along  with 
the  other  salts,  a  decomposition  may  occur.  This  is  marked 
by  a  browning  of  the  liquid  due  to  the  presence  of  nitrous 
acid. 
For  a  solid  medium  add  15  grams  of  agar  to  i  liter. 

Medium  34 
Nitrate  Bouillon 

Potassium  nitrate  (KNO3) 5  gm. 

Bouillon .    1000  c.c. 


SOLUTION  FOR   NITRATE    REDUCTION  107 

Medium  35 
Starch  Nitrate  Agar 

Agar  .......................................  ...       10  gm. 

Potassum  nitrate  (KNO3)  ........................         i  gm. 

Starch  (C6HioO5)n  ..............................         5  gm. 

Bouillon  .......................................   1000  c.c. 

After  colonies  develop,  treat  one  series  of  plates  with  a 
weak  solution  of  potassium  iodid  (KI)  in  dilute  HC1.  The 
treatment  should  result  in  the  development  of  a  character- 
istic blue  halo  about  the  colonies  that  reduce  nitrate  to 
nitrite. 

Hoffmann,  C.,  Centbl.  Bakt.  (etc.),  Abt.  2,  Bd.  34,  p.  386,  1912. 

Medium  36 
Solution  for  Nitrate  Reduction 

Dibasic  potassium  phosphate  (K2HPO4)  .........  0.5  gm. 

Potassium  nitrate  (KNO3)  .....................  10.0  gm. 

Ethyl  alcohol  (C2H5OH)  .......................  5.0  c.c. 

Tap-water  ...................................  IOOG.O  c.c. 

Beijerinck,  M.  W.,  Centbl.  Bakt.  (etc.),  Abt.  2,  Bd.  25,  p.  35,  1910. 

Medium  37 
Solution  for  Nitrate  Reduction 


Dibasic  potassium  phosphate  (KaHPC^)  .........  0.5  gm. 

Potassium  nitrate  (KNOs)  .....................  2.5  gm. 

Filter-paper  in  strips  ..........................  20.0  gm. 

Tap-water  ...................................  1000.0  c.c. 

Iterson,  C.  V.,  Centbl.  Bakt.  (etc.),  Abt.  2,  Bd.  n,  p.  689,  1904. 


108  SOIL  BACTERIOLOGY 

Medium  38 
Inorganic  Solution  for  Nitrate  Reduction 

Sodium  thiosulphite  (Na2S2O3  +  5H2O) 5.0  gm. 

Potassium  nitrate  (KNO3) 5.0  gm. 

Sodium  bicarbonate  (NaHCO3) i.o  gm. 

Dibasic  potassium  phosphate  (K2HPO4) 0.2  gm. 

Magnesium  chlorid  (MgCl2  +  6H2O) o.i  gm. 

Calcium  chlorid  (CaCl2  +  6H2O) trace 

Ferric  chlorid  (FeCl3  +  6H2O) trace 

Distilled  water , 1000.0  c.c. 

Lieske,  R.,  Ber.  d.  deutsch.  bot  Gesell.,  Bd.  30,  1912. 

NITROGEN  ASSIMILATING   ORGANISMS 

A.  Free  Nitrogen-fixing  Bacteria  (Aerobic) 

Medium  39 

Mannit  Solution 

Mannit  (C6H8(OH)6) 15.0  gm. 

Magnesium  sulphate  (MgSO4  +  yH2O) 0.2  gm. 

Monobasic  potassium  phosphate  (KH2PO4) 0.2  gm. 

Sodium  chlorid  (Nad) 0.2  gm. 

Calcium  sulphate  (CaSO4  +  2H2O) o.i  gm. 

Calcium  carbonate  (CaCO3) 5.0  gm. 

Distilled  water. 1000.0  c.c. 

Dissolve  the  phosphate  separately  in  a  little  water  and  make 
the  solution  neutral  to  phenolphthalein  with  N/i  NaOH; 
then  add  to  the  other  ingredients.  For  a  solid  medium 
add  15  grams  of  agar  to  each  liter. 

Ashby,  S.  F.,  Jour.  Agr.  Sci.,  vol.  2,  p.  38,  1907. 


MANNIT   SOLUTION  IOQ 

Medium  40 

— __ 

Dextrose  Solution 

Dibasic  potassium  phosphate  (K^HPCU) 0.2  gm. 

Dextrose  (CeHiaOe) 10.0  gm. 

Tap-water 1000.0  c.c.      * 

For  a  solid  medium  add  1.5  per  cent,  of  agar. 

(Anaerobic) 

Medium  41 
Solution  for  Anaerobic  Organisms 

Dibasic  potassium  phosphate  (K2HPO4) i.o    gm. 

Magnesium  sulphate  (MgSO4  +  7H2O) 0.2    gm. 

Sodium  chlorid  (NaCl) o.oi  gm. 

Ferrous  sulphate  (FeSO4  +  yH^O) o.oi  gm. 

Manganese  sulphate  (MnSO4  +  4H2O) o.oi  gm. 

Dextrose  (CeEfoQu) 20.0  gm. 

Calcium  carbonate  (CaCO3) 30.0  gm. 

Distilled  water 1000.0  c.c. 

Sterilize  at  15  pounds'  pressure  for  fifteen  minutes;  or,  bet- 
ter, steam  twenty  minutes  for  three  consecutive  days. 

Winogradsky,  S.,  Centbl.  Bakt.  (etc.),  Abt.  2,  Bd.  9,  p.  49,  1902. 

B.  Symbiotic  Nitrogen-fixing  Bacteria 

Medium  42 
Mannit  Solution 

Mannit  solution  same  as  No.  39  with  an  excess  of  cal- 
cium carbonate  removed. 

/•'I 


HO  SOIL  BACTERIOLOGY 

Medium  43 
Soil  Extract 

Soil  extract. 100.0  c.c. 

Dibasic  potassium  phosphate  (K2HPO4) 0.5  gm. 

Mannit  (C6H8(OH)6) 10.0  gm. 

Distilled  water 900.0  c.c. 

See  note,  page  95. 

Medium  44 

Saccharose  Solution 

Saccharose  (CuHaOu) 10.0  gm. 

Monobasic  potassium  phosphate  (KH2PO4) i.o  gm. 

Magnesium  sulphate  (MgSO4  +  7H2O) 0.2  gm. 

Distilled  water 1000.0  c.c. 

Medium  45 
Maltose  Solution 

Maltose  (CiaHaOii  +  H2O) 10.0  gm. 

Monobasic  potassium  phosphate  (KH2PO4) i.o  gm. 

Magnesium  sulphate  (MgSO4  +  yH2O) o.i  gm. 

Sodium  chlorid  (NaCl) : trace 

Ferrous  sulphate  (FeSO4  +  7H2O) trace 

Calcium  chlorid  (CaCl2)  fused trace 

Distilled  water 1000.0  c.c. 

In  order  to  prepare  a  solid  medium,  add  1 5  grams  of  agar  to 
each  liter  of  the  above  solutions. 

Medium  46 
Bean-extract  Caffein  Agar 

Agar 15  gm. 

Caffein  (C8H10N4O2  +  H2O) 2  gm. 

Dextrose  (C6Hi2O6) 20  gm. 

Bean  extract. .                                                             .  1000  c.c. 


SOLUTION   FOR   CELLULOSE   FERMENTATION  III 

Note. — Bean  extract:  Add  to  100  grams  of  powdered  bean  seed  in  a 
mortar  100  c.c.  of  N/i  KOH.  Allow  this  to  stand  a  few  minutes,  then  add 
water  sufficient  to  make  5  liters.  This  should  stand  twenty-four  hours. 
Siphon  off  the  clear  liquid,  neutralize  with  phosphoric  acid  (H3PO4  +  aq.), 
and  make  the  volume  up  to  5  liters. 

Zipfel,  H.,  Centbl.  Bakt.  (etc.),  Abt.  2,  Bd.  32,  pp.  107-131,  1911. 


Medium  47 
Peptone  Saccharose  Solution 

Monobasic  potassium  phosphate  (KH2PO4) 2.0  gm. 

Magnesium  sulphate  (MgSO4  +  yEkO) o.i  gm. 

Peptone i.o  gm. 

Saccharose  (Ci2H22On) 20.0  gm. 

Distilled  water 1000.0  c.c. 

Buchanan,  R.  E.,  Centbl.  Bakt.  (etc.),  Abt.  2,  Bd.  22,  p.  392,  1909. 


CELLULOSE   DESTROYING  ORGANISMS 

(Anaerobic) 

Medium  48 
Solution  for  Cellulose  Fermentation 

Dibasic  potassium  phosphate  (K2HPO4) i.o  gm. 

Ammonium  sulphate  ((NH4)2SO4) i.o  gm. 

Magnesium  sulphate  (MgSO4  +  7H2O) 0.5  gm. 

Calcium  carbonate  (CaCO3) 2.0  gm. 

Sodium  chlorid  (NaCl) trace 

Distilled  water 1000.0  c.c. 

Fill  large  test-tubes  about  half -full.    Add  strips  of  filter- 
paper. 

Omelianski,  W.,  Centbl.  Bakt.  (etc.),  Abt.  2,  Bd.  8,  p.  226,  1902. 


112  SOIL  BACTERIOLOGY 

(Aerobic) 

Medium  49 

Solution  for  Cellulose  Fermentation 

Dibasic  potassium  phosphate  (K2HPO4)  .........  0.5  gm. 

Ammonium  chlorid  (NH^Cl)  ...................  i.o  gm. 

Calcium  carbonate  (CaCO3)  ....................  10.0  gm. 

Tap-water  ...................................  1000.0  c.c. 

Prepare  in  shallow  layers  (loo-c.c.  portions  in  750-0.0. 
Erlenmeyer  flasks)  and  add  one  sheet  of  filter-paper  about 
10  cm.  in  diameter  to  each  culture. 

Iterson,  C.  V.,  Centbl.  Bakt.  (etc.),  Abt.  2,  Bd.  n,  p.  693,  1904. 

Medium  50 
Solution  for  Cellulose  Fermentation 


Dibasic  potassium  phosphate  (KaHPC^)  ...........         i  gm. 

Magnesium  sulphate  (MgSC>4  +  7H2O)  ............         i  gm. 

Sodium  carbonate  (Na2CO3),  anhydrous  ...........         i  gm. 

Ammonium  sulphate  ((NH^SC^)  .......  .  ........         2  gm. 

Calcium  carbonate  (CaCO3)  ......................         2  gm. 

Tap-water  ......................................   1000  c.c. 

Fill  large  test-tubes  about  half-full  of  the  above  medium, 
or  put  i5o-c.c.  portions  into  300-0.0.  Erlenmeyer  flasks. 
Immerse  in  the  liquid  of  the  test-tubes  one  or  two  strips  of 
filter-paper.  In  the  Erlenmeyer  flasks  use  a  single  sheet 
of  filter-paper  of  such  a  size  that  when  dropped  into  the 
liquid  it  will  nearly  cover  the  bottom  of  the  flask. 

McBeth  and   Scales,  Bui.  266,  United   States   Dept.  Agr.  Bur.  Plant 
Indus.,  p.  26,  1913. 


CELLULOSE    AGAR  113 

Medium  51 
Solution  for  Cellulose-fermenting  Molds 

Rye  bread  or  bran 10.0  gm. 

Dibasic  potassium  phosphate  (K2HPO4) 0.5  gm. 

Dextrose  (C6Hi2O6) 2.0  gm. 

Distilled  water • 1000.0  c.c. 

The  rye  bread  or  bran  and  water  are  boiled  together  for 
thirty  minutes.  The  mixture  is  filtered,  the  loss  in  weight 
restored,  and  the  phosphate  and  dextrose  added. 

Medium  52 
Cellulose  Agar 

Agar  (washed) •  15.0  gm. 

Cellulose 2.5  gm. 

Dibasic  potassium  phosphate  (K2HPO4) 0.2  gm. 

Magnesium  sulphate  (MgSC>4  +  7H2O) 0.2  gm. 

Potassium  carbonate  (K^COs) 0.4  gm. 

Calcium  chlorid  (CaCl2)  fused 0.02  gm. 

Ferric  sulphate  (Fe2(SO4)3) 0.02  gm. 

Sodium  chlorid  (NaCl) 0.02  gm. 

Peptone 0.50  gm. 

Distilled  water 1000.0  c.c. 

Dissolve  the  peptone  in  40  c.c.  of  distilled  water  and  filter. 
Dissolve  the  salts  in  the  filtrate  and  make  volume  equal  to 
100  c.c.  Add  400  c.c.  of  the  aqueous  cellulose  suspension 
and  3  per  cent,  of  aqueous  washed  agar.  Tube  in  i5-c.c. 
portions. 

Note. — Hydra  ted  cellulose  may  be  prepared  as  follows:  To  100  c.c.  of 
concentrated  sulphuric  acid  in  a  2-liter  flask  add  60  c.c.  of  water.  When 
cooled  to  60°  C.  add  5  grams  of  moist  filter-paper.  Shake  this  mass  violently 
until  the  cellulose  is  dissolved.  Now  fill  the  flask  with  water  containing 


114  SOIL  BACTERIOLOGY 

crushed  ice.  Transfer  to  a  filter  and  wash  until  all  traces  of  the  acid  are 
removed.  When  the  volume  of  the  nitrate  is  reduced  to  about  200  c.c., 
punch  a  hole  in  the  filter;  wash  filtrate  into  a  flask.  Make  volume  up  to 
800  c.c. 

Scales,  F.  M.,  Centbl.  Bakt.  (etc.),  Abt.  2,  Bd.  44,  p.  661,  1915. 


Medium  53 
Cellulose  Agar 

(a)  Agar 10  gm. 

Dibasic  potassium  phosphate  (K2HPO4) i  gm. 

Magnesium  sulphate  (MgSC>4  +  7H2O) i  gm. 

Sodium  chlorid  (NaCl) i  gm. 

Ammonium  sulphate  ((NH4)2SO4) 2  gm. 

Calcium  carbonate  (CaCOs) 2  gm. 

Tap-water 500  c.c. 

(6)  Cellulose  solution 500  c.c. 

1.  Pour  1000  c.c.  of  ammonium  hydroxid,  sp.  gr.  0.90, 
into  a  glass-stoppered  bottle;  add  250  c.c.  of  distilled  water 
and  75  grams  of  pure  copper  carbonate;  shake  the  solution 
vigorously  until  all  the  copper  is  dissolved.     (About  ten 
to  fifteen  minutes  are  ordinarily  required.) 

2.  To  the  copper-ammonium  solution  add  15  grams  of 
high-grade  sheet  filter-paper;  shake  vigorously  at  intervals 
of  ten  minutes  for  one-half  hour.     Examine  the  solution 
carefully  to  see  that  the  paper  is  completely  dissolved. 
If  any  particles  of  paper  remain  in  the  solution,  the  shaking 
must  be  continued  until  the  solution  is  perfectly  clear. 
Dilute  250  c.c.  of  the  amonium-copper-cellulose  solution 
to   10  liters  with  tap-water;  add  slowly,  with  frequent 
shaking,  a  weak  hydrochloric  acid  solution  prepared  by 
adding  500  c.c.  of  concentrated  acid  to  10  liters  of  tap- 
water.     Continue  the  addition  of  the  acid  until  the  blue 


STARCH    AGAR  I 15 

color  disappears;  add  a  slight  excess  of  acid,  shake  thor- 
oughly, and  allow  to  stand  a  few  minutes.  The  finely 
precipitated  cellulose  will  rise  to  the  top,  due  to  the  large 
quantity  of  free  hydrogen  liberated  in  the  precipitation 
process.  Shake  the  solution  vigorously  at  intervals  of  a 
few  minutes  to  dislodge  the  hydrogen.  As  soon  as  the 
free  hydrogen  has  escaped  the  cellulose  will  settle  rapidly. 

3.  Wash  through  repeated  changes  of  water  untill  free 
from  copper  and  chlorin.  After  the  washing  is  complete, 
bring  the  cellulose  in  the  solution  up  to  0.5  per  cent,  by 
allowing  to  settle  a  few  days,  and  siphoning  off  the  clear 
solution  or  by  evaporating.  Add  the  nutrient  salts  desired, 
together  with  i  per  cent,  of  thoroughly  washed  agar;  heat 
in  autoclave  or  boil  until  the  agar  is  dissolved;  tube  and 
sterilize  in  the  usual  way. 

McBeth,  I.  G.,  Soil  Science,  vol.  i,  No.  5,  pp.  438,  439,  1916. 


Medium    54 
Starch  Agar 

(a)  Agar 10  gm. 

(Salts  the  same  as  for  Cellulose  Agar,  Medium  52.) 
Tap-water 500  c.c. 

(6)  Starch  solution 500  c.c. 

To  10  grams  of  potato  starch  suspended  in  a  little  cold 
water  add  800  c.c.  of  boiling  water.  Concentrate  by 
boiling  to  500  c.c.  This  breaks  up  the  starch  grains  and 
should  give  a  nearly  transparent  starch  solution. 


Il6  SOIL   BACTERIOLOGY 

SULPHUR   ORGANISMS 

Reduction  and  Oxidation 

Medium  55 
Solution  for  Sulphate  Reduction 

Dibasic  potassium  phosphate  (K2HPO4) 0.5  gm. 

Magnesium  sulphate  (MgSO4  +  7H2O) i.o  gm. 

Ferrous  sulphate  (FeSO4  +  7H2O) trace 

Asparagin  (C4H8N2O3  +  H2O) i.o  gm. 

Sodium  lactate  (NaCsHsOa) 5.0  gm. 

Tap-water 1000.0  c.c. 

Van  Delden,  Centbl.  Bakt.  (etc.),  Abt.  2,  Bd.  n,  p.  88,  1904. 

Medium  56 
Gelatin  for  Sulphate  Reduction 

Gelatin 120.0  to  150.0  gm. 

Dibasic  potassium  phosphate  (K2HPO4) 0.5  gm. 

Magnesium  sulphate  (MgSO4  +  yH2O) i.o  gm. 

Iron-ammonium  sulphate  (FeSO4(NH4)2(SO4)   + 

6H2O) trace 

Asparagin  (C4HsN2O3  +  H2O) i.o  gm. 

Sodium  lactate  (NaCsHaOs) 5.0  gm. 

Distilled  water- 1000.0  c.c. 

Sterilize  in  the  autoclave  at  10  pounds'  pressure  for  fifteen 
minutes.     Cool  in  ice-water. 

Medium  57 
Solution  for  Sulphate  Reduction 

Dibasic  potassium  phosphate  (K2HPO4) 0.5  gm. 

Sodium  lactate  (NaCaHsOs) 5.0  gm. 

Ammonium  sulphate  ((NH4)2SO4) 2.0  gm. 

Ferrous  sulphate  (FeSO4  +  7H2O) trace 

Tap-water 1000.0  c.c. 


SOLUTION    FOR   HYDROGEN    SULPHID    FORMATION       1 17 

Medium  58 

Sulphate  Reduction 

Iron  lactate  (Fe(C3H5O3)2  +  3H2O) 5.0  gm. 

Ammonium  sulphate  ((NH4)2SO4) 2.0  gm. 

Dibasic  potassium  phosphate  (K2HPO4) 0.5  gm. 

Water 1000.0  c.c. 

To  prepare  a  solid  medium  add  the  above  ingredients  to 
15  per  cent,  gelatin.  Heat  the  medium  in  a  steamer  until 
the  precipitate  has  settled,  and  filter.  Sterilize  at  a  low 
temperature,  about  10  pounds'  pressure  for  fifteen  minutes, 
or  in  the  steamer  for  twenty  minutes  for  three  consecutive 
days. 

Medium  59 

Solution  for  Hydrogen  Sulphid  Formation  from  Protein 
and  from  Sulphur 

(a)  Iron  ammonium-sulphate  (FeSO4(NH4)2(SO4)  + 

6H2O) i  gm. 

Bouillon. . .  .    1000  c.c. 


(b)  Iron-ammonium  sulphate  (FeSO4(NH4)2(SO4)  + 

6H2O) i  gm. 

Sulphur  flowers  (S) i  gm. 

Bouillon. . .                                                             .  1000  c.c. 


In  the  presence  of  the  proper  organisms,  hydrogen  sulphid 
formation  will  be  noted  in  solution  (b)  long  after  solution 
(a)  has  been  reduced. 

Beijerinck,  W.  M.,  Centbl.  Bakt.  (etc.),  Abt.  2,  Bd.  i,  p.  5,  1895. 


Il8  SOIL   BACTERIOLOGY 

Medium  60 
Solution  for  the  Oxidation  of  Thio sulphates 

Sodium  thiosulphate  (Na2S2O3  +  sH2O) 5.0  gm. 

Sodium  hydrogen  carbonate  (NaHCO3) i.o  gm. 

Dibasic  potassium  phosphate  (K2HPO4) 0.2  gm. 

Ammonium  chlorid  (NEUCl) o.i  gm. 

Magnesium  chlorid  (MgCl2)  +  6H2O) o.i  gm. 

Tap-water 1000.0  c.c. 

Nathansohn,  Mitt.  a.  d.  zoolog.  Station  Neapel,  Bd.  15,  p.  655,  1902. 
Beijerinck,  W.  M.,  Centbl.  Bakt.  (etc.),  Abt.  2,  Bd.  n,  pp.  594-597, 1904. 

IRON   ORGANISMS 

Medium  61 

Solution  for  Thread  Bacteria 

Potassium  acetate  (KC2H3O2) 0.5  gm. 

Ferrous  carbonate  (FeCOs) . : 0.5  gm. 

Tap-water 1000.0  c.c. 

Medium  62 
Solution  for  Thread  Bacteria 

Ferrous  ammonium  citrate  (about  16  per  cent.  Fe)        0.5  gm. 
Tap-water 1000.0  c.c. 

Medium  63 

Solution  for  Isolating  Chlamydothrix 

(a)  Agar 10.0  gm. 

Manganese  peptone  (4  per  cent.  Mn2O3) 0.5  gm. 

Tap-water 1000.0  c.c. 

(b)  Gelatin 100.0  gm. 

Manganese  peptone  (4  per  cent.  Mn2O3) 0.25  gm. 

Peat  extract 1000.0  c.c. 

Make  the  reaction  slightly  alkaline  with  normal  potassium 
hydroxid. 


SOLUTION   FOR   YEASTS  IIQ 

Medium  64 



Agar  for  Isolating  Iron-precipitating  Bacteria 

Ferrous  ammonium  citrate  (about  16  per  cent.  Fe)        0.5  gm. 
Heyden-Nahrstoff  agar  (see  page  93) 1000.0  c.c. 

Medium  65 

Solution  for  Testing  the  Effect  of  Bacteria  on  Insoluble 
Phosphates 

Asparagin  (C4H8N2O3  +  H2O) / 5.0  gm. 

Sodium  chlorid  (NaCl) i.o  gm. 

Potassium  sulphate  (K2SO4) i.o  gm. 

Ferrous  sulphate  (FeSO4  +  ?H2O) o.oi  gm. 

Bone-meal 4-°  gm. 

Distilled  water 1000.0  c.c. 

The  bone-meal  should  be  passed  through  a  fine  sieve  and 
thoroughly  washed.  In  order  to  secure  the  largest  amount 
of  soluble  phosphoric  acid  the  cultures  should  be  incubated 
for  sixty  to  ninety  days. 

Sackett,  Patton  and  Brown,  Bui.  43,  Mich.  Agr.  Exp.  Sta.,  1908. 
YEASTS 

Medium  66 
Solution  for  Yeasts 

Dibasic  potassium  phosphate  (K2HPO4) 0.75  gm. 

Ammonium  sulphate  ((NH^SC^) 5.0  gm. 

Magnesium  sulphate  (MgSO4  +  7H2O) o.io  gm. 

Tartaric  acid  (C4HeO6) i.o  gm. 

Dextrose  (CeH^Oe) 100.0  gm. 

Distilled  water. .                                                    .  1000.0  c.c. 


120  SOIL  BACTERIOLOGY 

Medium  67 
Raisin  Extract 

Raisins 375  gm. 

Ammonium  chlorid  (NH4C1) 2  gm. 

Distilled  water 1000  c.c. 

Allow  the  raisins  to  stand  in  i  liter  of  water  for  one  to  two 
days.  Mash,  add  the  ammonium  chlorid,  cook  in  the 
steamer  for  thirty  minutes,  and  filter. 

Medium  68 
Solution  of  Yeast-water 

Yeast  cells 250  gm. 

Distilled  water 1000  c.c. 

Take  250  grams  of  pressed  yeast  or  500  c.c.  of  washed 
yeast;  steam  in  i  liter  of  water  for  one  hour.  Filter  while 
warm  and  steam  again  for  thirty  minutes.  Make  the 
reaction  neutral  to  phenolphthalein,  filter,  and  sterilize  in 
the  steamer  for  three  successive  days. 

Dextrose-yeast-water  may  be   prepared   by  dissolving 
10  per  cent,  of  dextrose  in  the  yeast- water. 

FUNGI 

Medium  69 
Solution  for  Fungi 

Ammonium  nitrate  (NH4NO3) 10.0  gm. 

Dibasic  potassium  phosphate  (K2HPO4) 5.0  gm. 

Magnesium  sulphate  (MgSO4  +  7H2O) 2.5  gm. 

Ferrous  chlorid  (FeCl2  +  aq.) trace 

Saccharose  (CwHaOn) 50.0  gm. 

Distilled  water. . .                                                     .  1000.0  c.c. 


POTATO   AGAR  121 

Medium  70 

Agar  for  Soil  Fungi 

Agar 15.0  gm. 

Dibasic  potassium  phosphate  (K2HPO4) 0.5  gm. 

Magnesium  sulphate  (MgSCU  +  7H2O) 0.2  gm. 

Dextrose  (C6Hi2O6) 10.0  gm. 

Soil  extract 200.0  c.c. 

Water 800.0  c.c. 

Jensen,  C.  N.,  Bui.  315,  Cornell  Agr.  Exp.  Sta.,  p.  430,  1912. 

Medium  71 
Solution  for  Fungi 

Dibasic  potassium  phosphate  (K2HPO4) i.o  gm. 

Magnesium  sulphate  (MgSO4  +  7H2O) 0.5  gm. 

Potassium  chlorid  (KC1) 0.5  gm. 

Ferrous  sulphate  (FeSC>4  +  7H2O) o.oi  gm. 

Sodium  nitrate  (NaNOs) 2.0  gm. 

Cane-sugar  (Ci2HaOu) 30.0  gm. 

Distilled  water.  .                                                     .  1000.0  c.c. 


Medium  72 
Potato  Agar 

Potato 200  gm. 

Agar 30  gm. 

Dextrose  (C6Hi2O6) 20  gm. 

Distilled  water. . .                                   1000  c.c. 


Peel  and  slice  200  grams  of  potatoes.  Cook  in  1000  c.c. 
water  for  one  hour  in  the  steamer.  Strain  or  decant  the 
clear  liquid  and  restore  it  to  original  volume.  Add  20 
grams  glucose  and  30  grams  agar.  Heat  in  steamer  until 
the  agar  is  dissolved.  Filter  through  cotton  filter. 


122  SOIL  BACTERIOLOGY 

Medium  73 

Clover  Agar 

Clover  (green) 500.0  gm. 

Agar 25.0  gm. 

Saccharose  (CwHaOu) 2.0  gm. 

Potassium  nitrate  (KNO3) 0.5  gm. 

Tap-water 1000.0  c.c. 

Extract  the  clover  tissue  by  heating  for  one  hour  in  the 
steamer;  filter  and  add  the  other  ingredients.     Add  i  to  2 

drops  of  N/io  hydrochloric  acid  to  each  tube  of  the  medium 
just  before  pouring  plates. 

ACTINOMYCETES 

Medium  74 
Solution  for  Actinomycetes 

Dibasic  potassium  phosphate  (K2HPO4) 0.5  gm. 

Potassium  nitrate  (KNO3) 3.0  gm. 

Calcium  malate  (CaC4H4O5)2  +  6H2O) 10.0  gm. 

Tap-water 1000.0  c.c. 

Krainsky,  A.,  Centbl.  Bakt.  (etc.),  Abt.  2,  Bd.  41,  pp.  649-688,  1914. 

Medium  75 

Agar  for  Actinomycetes 

Agar 15.0  gm. 

Glycerin 10.0  gm. 

Sodium  asparaginate  (NaC4H6NO4  +  H2O) i.o  gm. 

Glucose  (C6Hi2O6) i.o  gm. 

Ammonium  hydrogen  phosphate  (NH4H2PO4). ...  1.5  gm. 

Magnesium  sulphate  (MgSO4.+  7H2O) 0.2  gm. 

Calcium  chlorid  (CaCl2)  fused o.i  gm. 

Potassium  chlorid  (KC1) o.i  gm. 

Ferric  chlorid  (FeCl3  +  6H2O) trace 

Distilled  water , 1000.0  c.c. 

Conn,  H.  J.,  Jour.  Bact.,  vol.  i,  p.  198,  1916. 


SOLUTION   FOR  ALG.E  123 

Medium  76 

Solution  for  Actinomycetes 
Same  as  No.  71. 

ALG.E 

Medium  77 
Solution  for  Algae 

Ammonium  nitrate  (NH^NOs) 0.5    gm. 

Magnesium  sulphate  (MgSO4  +  7H2O) 0.2    gm. 

Calcium  chlorid  (CaCl2)  fused o.i    gm. 

Ferrous  sulphate  (FeSO4  +  7H2O) o.oi  gm. 

Dibasic  potassium  phosphate  (K2HPO4) 0.2    gm. 

Distilled  water 1000.0  c.c. 

For  a  solid  medium  add  2  per  cent,  of  washed  agar.  Let 
the  agar  stand  in  a  weak  solution  of  alkali  for  several  days, 
then  wash. 

Beijerinck,  W.  M.,  Centbl.  Bakt.  (etc.),  Abt.  2,  Bd.  4,  p.  785,  1898. 

Medium  78 

Solution  for  Algae 

Calcium  nitrate  (Ca(NO3)2  +  4H2O) 1.65  gm. 

Potassium  chlorid  (KC1) 0.50  gm. 

Magnesium  sulphate  (MgSO4  +  7H2O) 0.50  gm. 

Monobasic  potassium  phosphate  (KH2PO4) 0.50  gm. 

Ferric  chlorid  (FeCl3  +  6H2O) trace 

Distilled  water 1000.0  c.c. 

For  a  solid  medium  add  2  per  cent,  of  washed  agar. 


124  SOIL  BACTERIOLOGY 

HIGHER   PLANTS 

Medium  79 
Solution  for  Growing  Higher  Plants 

(a)  Calcium  nitrate  (Ca(N03)2  +  4H2O)  ..........  100  gm. 

Potassium  nitrate  (KNOs)  ...................  25  gm. 

Sodium  chlorid  (NaCl)  .......................  15  gm. 

Distilled  water  ..............................  1000  c.c. 

(6)  Monopotassium  phosphate  (KH2PO4)  ..........       25  gm. 

Distilled  water  ....................  .  .........   1000  c.c. 

(c)  Magnesium  sulphate  (MgSO4  +  7H2O)  ........       50  gm. 

Distilled  water  ...............................   1000  c.c. 

(d)  Ferric  chlorid  (FeCls  +  6H2O)  ................         5  gm. 

Distilled  water  ..........  .  ..................     250  c.c. 

Take  lo-c.c.  portions  of  solutions  (a),  (£>),  and  (c)  to  1000 
c.c.  of  water.    Add  i  to  2  drops  of  solution  (d). 
Tollens,  B.,  Jour.  f.  Landw.,  Bd.  30,  pp.  537-540,  1882. 

Medium  80 
Solution  for  Growing  Higher  Plants 


(a)  Ammonium  nitrate  (NH^NOs)  ..............  32.0  gm. 

Distilled  water  ............................  1000.0  c.c. 

(b)  Monocalcium  phosphate  (CaH4(PO4)2)  .......  10.0  gm. 

Distilled  water  .............................  1000.0  c.c. 

(c)  Potassium  sulphate  (K2SC>4)  ................  20.0  gm. 

Distilled  water  ............................  1000.0  c.c. 

(d)  Magnesium  sulphate  (MgSO4  +  7H2O)  ......  8.0  gm. 

Distilled  water  ............................  1000.0  c.c. 

(e)  Ferric  chlorid  (FeCl3  +  6H2O)  ..............  o.i  gm. 

Distilled  water  .............................  250.0  c.c. 


SOLUTION    FOR   HIGHER   PLANTS  125 

Solutions  should  be  prepared  with  ammonia-free  water 
and  chemically  pure  salts. 

Dilute  lo-c.c.  portions  of  (a),  (6),  (c),  and  (d)  and  i  c.c. 
of  (e)  in  1000  c.c.  of  water.  If  a  nitrogen-free  medium  is 
desired,  omit  (a).  Plant  food  solutions  should  be  renewed 
at  regular  intervals  of  about  one  week  each. 

Hopkins  and  Pettit,  Soil  Fertility  Laboratory  Manual,  p.  22,  1910. 


Medium  81 
Solution  for  Higher  Plants 

Potassium  nitrate  (KNO3) i.oo  gm. 

Magnesium  sulphate  (MgSO4  4-  7H2O) 0.25  gm. 

Calcium  sulphate  (CaSO4  +  2H2O) 0.25  gm. 

Tricalcium  phosphate  (Ca3(PO4)2) 0.25  gm. 

Ferrous  phosphate  (Fe3(PO4)2) 0.25  gm. 

Distilled  water.  .                                                     .  1000.00  c.c. 


This  solution  is  supposed  to  prevent  the  growth  of  algae. 

Crone,  G.,  Stizungsber-Niederrhein.  Gesell.  Nat.  und  Heilkunde,  Bonn., 
pp.  167-173,  1902. 

Medium  82 
Soft  Agar  for  Plants 

For  growing  plants  0.75  per  cent,  of  agar  in  mannit  solu- 
tion (see  page  108)  is  very  satisfactory. 


Medium  83 
Solution  for  Higher  Plants 


(a)  Monobasic  potassium  phosphate  (KHaPC^)..  ,     i22.5gm.. 
Distilled  water  ...............  .......  .......   1000.0  c.c. 


126  SOIL  BACTERIOLOGY 

(6)  Calcium  nitrate  (Ca(NO3)2) '42.7  gm. 

Distilled  water 1000.0  c.c. 

(c)  Magnesium  sulphate  (MgSO4  +  7H2O) go. 2  gm. 

Distilled  water 1000.0  c.c. 

(d)  Ferric  phosphate  (FePO4  +  4H2O) . .  .         2.2  gm. 

Distilled  water. 1000.0  c.c. 

To  prepare  the  complete  nutrient  solution,  take  2o-c.c. 
portions  of  (a),  (b),  and  (c)  and  dilute  to  i  liter;  now  add 
0.5  c.c.  of  solution  (d). 

Shive,  J.  W.,  Physiological  Researches,  Vol.  I,  No.  7,  Johns  Hopkins 
University,  pp.  327-397,  1915. 


Medium  84 
Solution  Similar  to  Sea-water 

Sodium  chlorid  (Nad) .  26.0  gm. 

Magnesium  chlorid  (MgCl2  +  6H2O) 3.7  gm. 

Potassium  chlorid  (KC1) i.o  gm. 

Magnesium  sulphate  (MgSC>4  +  7H2O) 1.7  gm. 

Calcium  sulphate  (CaSO*  +  2H2O) i.o  gm. 

Distilled  water 1000.0  c.c. 

This  solution  is  recommended  for  the  cultivation  of  organ- 
isms accustomed  to  sea-water. 

Medium  85 

Agar  for  Preserving  Plate  Cultures 

Washed  agar 20  gm. 

Glycerin  (C3H6(OH)3) 500  c.c. 

Distilled  water 500  c.c. 

Dissolve  the  agar  in  the  water  by  heating  in  a  steamer,  add 
the  glycerin,  and  filter  through  glass  wool. 


SECTION  VIII 

PREPARATION  OF  STAINS 

PREPARE  saturated  alcoholic  solutions  of  methylene-blue, 
gentian- violet,  and  fuchsin. 

1.  Place  the  dye  in  a  large  test-tube  (about  one-fourth 
full)  and  fill  with  95  per  cent,  alcohol. 

2.  Let  stand  twenty-four  hours  and  shake  from  time  to 
time. 

(1)  Loffler's  Methylene-blue: 

Saturated  alcoholic  solution  of  methylene-blue 30  c.c. 

Potassium  hydroxid  in  distilled  water  .(i  :  10,000) ...     70  c.c. 

(2)  Gentian-violet  (Aqueous): 

Saturated  alcoholic  solution  of  gentian- violet 5  c.c. 

Distilled  water 95  c.c. 

(3)  Carbol-fuchsin: 

Saturated  alcoholic  solution  of  fuchsin 10  c.c. 

Aqueous  solution  of  carbolic  acid  (5  per  cent.) 90  c.c. 

(4)  Gram's  lodin  Solution: 

Metallic  iodin i  gm. 

Potassium  iodid 2  gm. 

Water 300  c.c. 

Dissolve  in  a  few  cubic  centimeters  of  water.     When  in 
solution  bring  volume  to  300  c.c. 

137 


128  SOIL  BACTERIOLOGY 

(5)  Meissner's  Solution: 

Metallic  iodin 7  gm. 

Potassium  iodid 20  gm. 

Water..  .   100  c.c. 


(6)  Aniline  Oil  Gentian-violet: 

Saturated  alcoholic  solution  of  gentian-violet 10  c.c. 

Aniline  oil  in  water 30  c.c. 


Note. — Prepare  aniline  water  by  shaking  2  c.c.  of  aniline  oil  with  100  c.c. 
of  water  and  filter  until  clear. 


Directions  for  the  Use  of  Stains 

1.  Take  a  clean  cover-glass  or  a  slide,  flame,  and  add  a 
loopful  of  sterile  water. 

2.  With  a  platinum  needle  remove  a  small  quantity  of 
the  bacterial  colony.     Do  not  take  too  much  growth  on 
the  needle.     Mix  this  thoroughly  with  the  water  and  spread 
over  the  cover-glass.     If  the  cover-glass  is  not  clean,  the 
water  will  collect  in  small  drops. 

3.  Allow  to  dry  by  passing  back  and  forth  high  above  the 
flame,  and  finally  pass  rapidly  two  or  three  times  through 
the  flame.    This  should  fix  the  bacteria  to  the  cover-glass 
and  precipitate  albuminous  substances. 

4.  Flood  the  cover-glass  with  stain  and  let  stand  for 
ten  to  thirty  seconds.     In  order  to  secure  a  deeper  stain, 
warm  gently. 

5.  Wash  in  water  until  the  mount  is  clear. 

6.  For  a  temporary  mount,  invert  the  wet  cover-glass 
on  a  slide,  blot  with  filter-paper,  and  examine  under  micro- 
scope.    For  a  permanent  mount,  dry  the  cover-glass  above 
the  flame  and  mount  in  Canada  balsam  or  euparal. 


DIRECTIONS  FOR  THE  USE  OF  STAINS       I2Q 

7.  The  mount  should  be  labeled  as  follows:  Name  of 
organism,  stain,  and  date : 


&        o 


1.  Gram's  Stain: 

(a)  Spread  an  even,  thin  film. 

(b)  Fix  in  the  flame. 

(c)  Apply  aniline  oil  .gentian- violet  for  two  to  five  min- 

utes. 

(d)  Wash  in  water. 

(e)  Apply  Gram's  iodin  for  one  minute,  or  until  the 

preparation  has  a  coffee  color. 
(/")  Wash  in  water. 
(g)  Decolorize  with  95  per  cent,  alcohol  until  no  more 

violet  color  streams  out. 
(ti)  Wash  in  water. 

2.  Endospore  Stain  (Double): 

(a)  Spread  thin  film. 

(b)  Fix  by  passing  through  flame  three  times. 

(c)  Stain  with  hot  carbol-fuchsin  five  minutes  (do  not 

boil). 

(d)  Clean  under  side  of  slide  with  2\  per  cent,  acetic  acid. 

(e)  Decolorize  the  smear  with  i\  per  cent,  acetic  acid 

until  the  pink  color  is  nearly  removed  from  film. 

9 


130  SOIL  BACTERIOLOGY 

(/)  Wash  thoroughly  with  distilled  water. 

(g)  Dry  and  blot. 

(h)  Counterstain  with  Loffler's  methylene-blue  for  ten 

seconds, 
(i)  Wash  in  water,  mount,  and  examine. 


3.  Capsule  Stain: 

(a)  Spread  film  without  the  use  of  water. 

(b)  Air  dry. 

(c)  Fix  by  flaming. 

(d)  Apply  glacial  acetic  acid,  drain  immediately  (clo  not 

wash  in  water). 

(e)  Wash  off  acid  with  carbol-fuchsin  three  times,  as 

rapidly  as  possible. 
(/")  Wash  in  i  per  cent,  salt  solution. 
(g)  Mount  in  the  salt  solution. 

4.  Flagella  Stain  (Preparation  of  Culture): 

(a)  Transfer  cultures  twice  each  day  for  five  days;  in 

the  morning  into  bouillon,  and  in  the  evening  on 
to  fresh  slopes  of  bouillon  agar. 

(b)  Carefully  inoculate   a   tube   of   sterile   city  water. 

(Slant  the  tube  and  make  the  inoculation  at  the 
base.  Then  gently  raise  tube  to  upright  position.) 
Incubate  for  one  hour  at  37°  C. 

(c)  Make  smears  from  the  top  of  the  water  culture, 

using  the  greatest  care  in  each  step  to  prevent  the 
breaking  of  the  flagella. 

(d)  Air  dry. 

(e)  Flame  once  only. 


DIRECTIONS   FOR   THE   USE    OF    STAINS  13! 

5.  Loffler's  Flagella  Stain: 

(a)  Preparation  of  the  Mordant. — Dissolve  2  grams  of 
desiccated  tarmic  acid  in  15  c.c.  of  distilled  water 
(heat  gently),  and  add  5  c.c.  of  a  saturated  solution 
of  ferrous  sulphate,  i  c.c.  of  an  alcoholic  solution 
of  fuchsin  (i  gram  of  fuchsin,  25  c.c.  warm  ab- 
solute alcohol),  i  c.c.  of  i  per  cent,  sodium  hydrate 
solution.  Filter. 

(a)  Preparation  of  Stain. — One  part  of  a  saturated  alco- 
holic solution  of  fuchsin  to  4^  parts  of  a  5  per  cent, 
solution  of  carbolic  acid. 

0)  Filter. 

(a)  Method  of  Staining. — Mordant  one  minute. 

(b)  Wash   in   distilled   water.     (Have   water   in   wide- 

mouthed  beaker.) 

(c)  Stain    with    carbol-fuchsin    one-half    minute    (heat 

gently). 

(d)  Wash  in  water. 

(e)  Dry  thoroughly. 

(f)  Treat  with  xylol. 

(g)  Mount  in  balsam. 

6.  Zettnow's  Flagella  Stain: 

(a)  Solution   (i):    Dissolve   2   grams   of   tartar  emetic 

(2K(SbO)C4H4O6  +  H2O)  in  40  c.c.  of  water. 

(b)  Solution    (2) :     Dissolve    10   grams   of   tannic   acid 

(Ci4HioO9)  in  200  c.c.  of  water. 

(c)  Warm  solution  (2)  to  50°  to  60°  C.,  add  30  c.c.  of  the 

tartar  emetic  solution  (i).     The  turbidity  of  the 
mordant  should  entirely  clear  up  on  heating. 

(d)  Next  dissolve   i   gram  silver  sulphate  in   250  c.c. 

distilled  water. 


132  SOIL  BACTERIOLOGY 

(e)  Of  this  solution  take  50  c.c.,  and  add  to  it,  drop  by 
drop,  ethylamin  (33  per  cent,  solution)  until  the 
yellowish-brown  precipitate  which  forms  at  first 
is  entirely  dissolved  and  the  fluid  is  clear.  Only 
a  few  drops  are  required. 

(/")  Float  the  cover-slips  in  a  little  mordant  contained 
in  a  Petri  dish  which  is  heated  over  a  water-bath 
for  five  minutes. 

(g)  Take  the  dish  off  the  water-bath,  and  as  soon  as  the 
preparation  becomes  slightly  opalescent,  wash 
thoroughly  in  distilled  water. 

(ti)  Then  heat  a  few  drops  of  the  ethylamin-silver 
sulphate  solution  upon  the  mordanted  cover 
preparation  until  it  just  steams  and  the  margin 
appears  black. 

(i)  Wash  and  mount  in  balsam. 


SECTION  IX 

PREPARATION  OF  REAGENTS  AND  QUALITATIVE  METHODS 
OF  ANALYSIS 

Pyrogallic  Acid  for  Absorbing  Oxygen. — For  every  100 
c.c.  of  air  space  take  i  gram  of  pyrogallic  acid  and  10 
c.c.  of  a  10  per  cent,  solution  of  sodium  or  potassium 
hydroxid. 

Note. — To  Prepare  an  Anaerobic  Jar. — Cover  the  bottom  of  an  anaerobic 
jar  with  ^-inch  layer  of  pyrogallic  acid.  Fit  the  cover  tightly  to  the  jar 
with  vaselin  and  draw  out  the  air  with  a  suction-pump,  and  when  there  is 
a  good  vacuum,  run  in  75  to  100  c.c.  alkali. 

(1)  Phenolphthalein : 

Phenolphthalein 10  gm. 

Alcohol  (86  per  cent.) 1000  c.c. 

Dissolve  the  phenolphthalein  in  the  alcohol  and  neu- 
tralize with  sodium  hydroxid  until  faintly  pink. 

(2)  Methyl-orange: 

Methyl-orange 0.2  gm. 

Distilled  water 1000.0  c.c. 

Dissolve  the  solid  methyl-orange  in  hot  water,  allow  to 
cool,  and  if  a  deposit  forms,  filter.  If  the  sodium  salt  is 
used  instead  of  the  acid,  take  0.22  gram  to  i  liter  of  water. 
Add  0.67  c.c.  of  normal  hydrochloric  acid,  let  stand,  and 
filter. 

133 


134  SOIL  BACTERIOLOGY 

(3)  Methyl-red: 

Methyl-red 2  gm. 

Alcohol  (95  per  cent.) 1000  c.c. 

Dissolve  the  methyl-red  in  alcohol  and  filter. 

(4)  Cochineal: 

Cochineal  (pulverized) 6  gm. 

Alcohol  (95  per  cent.) 50  c.c. 

Distilled  water. . .  .   200  c.c. 


Shake  the  cochineal  in  the  mixture  of  water  and  alcohol. 
Allow  to  stand  for  two  days  at  room  temperature.  Filter 
until  clear.  The  color  of  this  solution  should  be  a  deep 
ruby  red ;  in  the  presence  of  alkali  a  violet  color,  and  in  the 
presence  of  acid  a  yellowish-red  color. 

(5)  Preparation  of  Standard  Solution  of  Sulphuric  Acid. — 
A  normal  solution  of  sulphuric  acid  is  one-half  the  molecular 
weight  of  H2SO4  in  grams,  diluted  to  i  liter  with  distilled 
water.  Since  the  molecular  weight  of  sulphuric  acid  is 
(2+32+64)  98,  then  49  grams,  one-half  of  98,  is  the  amount 
necessary  for  each  liter. 

1.  In  order  to  secure  49  grams  of  H2SO4,  it  requires  49 
divided  by  1.80,  or  27.2  c.c.  of  chemically  pure  acid.     To 
be  sure  that  sufficient  acid  has  been  used,  measure  out 
about  27.5  c.c.  of  acid. 

2.  Place  in  looo-c.c.  graduated  flask,  make  up  to  1000 
c.c.,  and  mix  carefully. 

3.  From  this  mixture  remove  lo-c.c.  portions,  accurately 
measured  in  a  ic-c.c.  pipet,  and  place  in  weighing  bottles 
which  have  been  thoroughly  cleaned,  dried  in  an  oven, 
cooled,  and  weighed. 


REAGENTS    AND    QUALITATIVE    METHODS  135 

4.  One  c.c.  of  chemically  pure  ammonia  is  added  to  each 
weighing  bottle  to  neutralize  the  sulphuric  acid. 

5.  The  water  and  excess  of  ammonia  is  then  evaporated 
in  an  oven  at  100°  C.  and  the  ammonium  sulphate  remains 
behind.     If  the  chemicals  are  pure,  1000  c.c.  of  the  solution 
should  give  49  grams  of  sulphuric  acid.     In  10  c.c.  of  the 
solution  there  should  be  0.49  gram  of  H2SO4. 

H2S04  :  (NH4)2SO4  ::  98  :  132 
49         :         x          ::  98  :  132 
x         =  0.66 

If  the  solution  is  exactly  normal,  there  should  be  0.6600 
gram  of  (NH^SC^  formed  from  10  c.c.  In  case  the  amount 
of  (NH4)2SO4  formed  is  too  great,  its  factor  is  determined 
by  dividing  0.6600  into  the  weight  of  ammonium  sulphate 
found.  If,  for  instance,  the  weight  of  ammonium  sulphate 
is  0.6675,  the  factor  of  the  solution  is  1.0113  +  .  This 
means  that  10  c.c.  of  the  solution  is  equivalent  to  10.113  c-c- 
of  normal  solution. 

(6)  Nessler's  Reagent  for  Ammonia: 

1.  Dissolve   50  grams  of  potassium  iodid  in  a  small 
quantity  of  cold  distilled  water. 

2.  Add  a  saturated  solution  of  mercuric  chlorid  until  a 
slight  precipitate  persists. 

3.  Now  add  400  c.c.  of  a  50  per  cent,  solution  of  potassium 
hydroxid  made  by  dissolving  the  potassium  hydroxid  and 
allowing  it  to  clarify  by  sedimentation  before  using. 

4.  Dilute  to  1000  c.c.,  allow  to  settle  for  one  week,  and 
decant.     This  solution  gives  the  required  color  with  am- 
monia within  five  minutes  after  addition. 

5.  Keep  the  Nessler's  solution  in  a  well-stoppered  bottle 
away  from  the  light. 


136  SOIL  BACTERIOLOGY 

Test  for  Ammonia. — Add  to  a  drop  of  Nessler's  solution 
in  a  test  plate  a  loopful  of  the  solution  to  be  tested.  A 
deep  golden-yellow  color  indicates  the  presence  of  ammonia. 

(7)  Trommsdorfs  Reagent  for  Nitrites: 

1.  Add  slowly,  with  constant  stirring,  a  boiling  solution 
of  20  grams  of  zinc  chlorid  in  100  c.c.  of  distilled  water  to 
a  mixture  of  4  grams  of  starch  in  water.     Continue  heating 
until  the  starch  is  dissolved  as  much  as  possible,  and  the 
solution  is  nearly  clear. 

2.  Then  dilute  with  water  and  add  2  grams  zinc  iodid. 

3.  Dilute  to  i  liter  and  filter. 

4.  Store  in  well-stoppered  bottles  in  the  dark. 

Test  for  Nitrites. — Place  3  drops  of  Trommsdorfs  reagent 
in  depression  on  test  plate.  Add  i  drop  of  dilute  sulphuric 
acid  (i  13).  Remove  a  loopful  of  the  solution  to  be  tested 
and  touch  to  surface  of  reagent.  A  blue  color  indicates  the 
presence  of  nitrites. 


(8)  Sulphanilic  Reagent  for  Nitrites: 

(a)  Sulphanilic  acid 0.5  gm. 

Acetic  acid  (33  per  cent.) 15°-°  c.c. 

(&)  Alpha-naphthylamin o.i  gm. 

Distilled  water 20.0  c.c. 

Acetic  acid  (33  per  cent.) 150.0  c.c. 

Dissolve  the  alpha-naphthylamin  by  heating  in  20  c.c.  of 
water,  filter,  then  add  the  acetic  acid.  Combine  solutions 
(a)  and  (6),  and  keep  in  a  tightly  stoppered  bottle.  This 
solution  is  sensitive  to  2  parts  of  nitrite  in  10,000,000, 
giving  a  reddish-pink  color. 

Griess,  Ber.  d.  deutsch.  chem.  Gesell.,  12,  p.  426,  1870. 


REAGENTS   AND    QUALITATIVE   METHODS  137 

(9)  Diphenylamin  Reagent : 

1.  Dissolve  0.7  gram  of  diphenylamin  in  a  mixture  of 
60  c.c.   of  concentrated  sulphuric  acid  and   28.8  c.c.   of 
distilled  water. 

2.  Cool  this  mixture  and  add  slowly  11.3  c.c.  of  con- 
centrated hydrochloric  acid  (sp.  gr.  1.19).     After  standing 
overnight  some  of  the  base  separates,  showing  that  the 
reagent  is  saturated. 

Withers  and  Ray,  Jour.  Amer.  Chem.  Soc.,  vol.  xxxiii,  pp.  708-711, 1911. 

Test  for -Nitrates. — Place  i  drop  of  the  substance  to  be 
tested  in  a^epression  on  the  test  plate.  Add  i  drop  of 
diphenylamn^solution  and  allow  the  solutions  to  mix 
thoroughly.  ^ien  add  2  drops  of  concentrated  sulphuric 
acid.  A  deep  blue  color  indicates  nitrates.  This  test 
cannot  be  made  in  the  presence  of  nitrites,  chloric  and 
selenic  acids,  ferric  chlorid,  and  many  other  oxidizing 
agents. 

In  order  to  detect  nitrates  in  the  presence  of  nitrites, 
add  a  concentrated  solution  of  urea  to  a  small  amount  of 
the  liquid  in  a  test-tube.  Now  add  in  the  bottom  of  the 
tube  (by  means  of  a  pipet)  a  dilute  solution  of  sulphuric 
acid.  This  should  destroy  a  greater  part  of  the  nitrous 
acid. 

CO(NH2)2     +     2HNO2     =     CO2     +     3H20     +     2N2 

(10)  Brucin  Reagent. — Dissolve  i.o  gram  of  brucin  in 
10  c.c.  of  50  per  cent,  pure  concentrated  sulphuric  acid  and 
make  up  to  100  c.c.  with  distilled  water. 

Test  for  Nitrates. — Place  i  drop  of  the  substance  to  be 
tested  in  a  depression  on  the  test  plate  and  add  3  drops  of 
concentrated  sulphuric  acid.  Now  add  i  drop  of  brucin 
solution.  If  nitrates  are  present,  a  red  color  develops 


138  SOIL .  BACTERIOLOGY 

quickly,  which  changes  to  orange,  then  slowly  to  lemon  or 
yellow,  and  finally  becomes  a  greenish  yellow. 

(n)  Phenolsulphonic  Acid. — Dissolve  25  grams  of  pure 
white  phenol  crystals  in  150  c.c.  of  pure  concentrated 
sulphuric  acid,  add  75  c.c.  of  fuming  sulphuric  acid  (13  per 
cent.  SOs),  stir  well,  and  heat  for  two  hours  at  about 
100°  C.  The  reagent  prepared  in  this  way  should  not 
contain  any  mono-acids  or  any  tri-acids.  Two  c.c.  of 
this  reagent  give  reliable  results  with  not  more  than  5 
milligrams  of  nitrate  nitrogen. 

Chamot,  Pratt,  and  Redfield,  Jour.  Amer.  Chem.  Soc.,  vol.  xxxiii,  pp. 
381-384,  1911. 

(12)  Fehling'  s  Reagents : 

(a)  Copper  sulphate  (CuSO4  +  sH2O) 34-639  gm. 

Distilled  water 500.0  c.c. 

(b)  Sodium  potassium  tartrate  (KNaC4H4O6  + 

4H2O) 178.0  gm. 

Sodium  hydroxid 50.0  gm. 

Distilled  water 500.0  c.c. 

Pulverize  the  crystalline  substances  before  attempting 
to  dissolve. 

Qualitative  Test. — Mix  equal  quantities  of  (a)  and  (ft), 
about  5  c.c.  of  each.  Add  an  equal  amount  of  the  solution 
to  be  tested  and  boil.  A  red  precipitate  indicates  reducing 
sugar. 

(13)  Citric  Acid  Reagent: 

Mercuric  sulphate  solution 50  gm. 

Sulphuric  acid  (cone.) 200  c.c. 

Distilled  water 1000  c.c. 

Test  for  Citric  Acid. — To  a  water  solution  of  the  citric 
acid  add  2  c.c.  of  the  mercury  reagent  and  boil.  Now  add  5 


REAGENTS   AND   QUALITATIVE   METHODS  139 

to  10  drops  of  a  potassium  permanganate  solution  (2  grams 
to  1000  c.c.).  In  the  presence  of  citric  acid  the  solution 
becomes  colorless  and  a  white  precipitate  is  formed. 

Abderhalden,  E.,  Handbuch  der  Biochemischen  Arbeitsmethoden,  Bd.  5, 
p.  409,  1913. 

Tests  for  Indol  and  Skatol : 

(A)  i.  Add  a  few  drops  of  a  5  per  cent,  solution  of 

vanillin  in  95  per  cent,  alcohol  to  5  or  6  c.c.  of 
the  indol  solution. 

2.  Make  the  mixture  strongly  acid  with  3  to  4  c.c. 

of  concentrated  hydrochloric  acid.     A  beautiful 
orange  color  denotes  indol. 

3.  If  skatol  is  present,  the  same  reagents  produce  a 

deep  violet  color  upon  heating.     These  tests 
are  very  sensitive. 

4.  The  color  formed  with  indol  is  only  very  slightly 

soluble   in   chloroform,   while   the   color  with 
skatol  is  soluble  in  chloroform. 

Nelson,  V.  E.,  Jour.  Biol.  Chem.,  vol.  xxiv,  pp.  527-532,  1916. 

(B)  i.  Add  i  c.c.  of  a  o.oi  per  cent,  solution  of  potassium 

nitrite. 

2.  Now  add  a  few  drops  of  sulphuric  acid  and  warm 

in  a  water-bath.     In  the  presence  of  indol  a 
pink  color  appears. 

3.  If  a  solution  containing  skatol  is  treated  with  a 

few  drops  of  nitric  acid  and  a  dilute  solution  of 
potassium  nitrite,  a  white  turbidity  is  noted. 

(14)  Dillon's  Reagent: 

Mercury  metallic 50  gm. 

Nitric  acid  (sp.  gr.  1.42) 100  gm. 

Dissolve    the   mercury   in   its   weight   of   concentrated 
nitric  acid  and  dilute  with  an  equal  volume  of  water.     Only 


140  SOIL   BACTERIOLOGY 

freshly  prepared  solution  should  be  used.  Proteins  when 
heated  with  Millon's  reagent  turn  a  brick  red. 

Biuret  Reaction. — Add  sodium  or  potassium  hydroxid 
to  a  dilute  sulphuric  acid  solution  containing  protein  until 
alkaline,  and  a  few  drops  of  a  very  dilute  solution  of  copper 
sulphate.  The  presence  of  protein  will  be  marked  by  the 
gradual  spreading  of  a  reddish-violet  color  through  the 
solution. 

Mercuric  Chlorid. — A  stock  solution  is  prepared  and 
diluted  to  the  desired  strength. 

Stock  Solution:  Add  i  part  of  mercuric  chlorid  to  2.5 
parts  of  commercial  hydrochloric  acid  (40  per  cent.  HgCl2 
inHCl). 

In  order  to  prepare  a  i  :  1000  solution,  the  concentration 
commonly  used  for  disinfecting  purposes,  take  2.5  c.c.  of 
the  stock  solution  and  dilute  to  1000  c.c. 

Solution  for  Sealing  Bottles. — Melt  together  equal  parts 
of  gutta-percha  and  paraffin. 

Seal  for  Museum  Jars. — A  transparent,  seal  for  museum 
jars  may  be  made  by  wetting  celluloid  with  acetone.  Cut 
strips  or  rings  of  celluloid  a  little  wider  than  the  ground- 
glass  surface,  dip  in  acetone,  and  place  upon  the  edge  of 
the  jar.  Cover  before  the  acetone  evaporates  and  press 
slightly. 

Preserving  Plants  in  Natural  Colors. — Saturate  with 
copper  acetate  a  50  per  cent,  glacial  acetic  acid  solution  in 
water. 

Take  4  parts  of  water  to  i  part  of  the  stock  solution. 
Boil  the  plant  tissue  to  be  preserved  for  five  to  ten  minutes, 
or  until  the  color  becomes  yellowish  and  then  green.  Wash 
in  water  and  preserve  in  a  4  or  5  per  cent,  solution  of 
formalin. 


SECTION  X 

QUANTITATIVE  METHODS  OF  ANALYSIS 

(i)  Moisture. — Weigh  from  5  to  10  grams  of  soil  into  a 
glass  or  aluminum  dish  and  dry  at  100°  C.  until  there  is  no 
further  change  in  weight.  About  six  to  twelve  hours  are 
generally  sufficient.  Cool  in  a  desiccator  and  weigh. 
Determine  all  percentages  of  moisture  on  the  dry  basis. 

Record  data  as  follows: 

Weight  of  dish  and  moist  soil  

Weight  of  dish  and  dried  soil  

Loss  . 


(A  D  S  —  W  F  S) 
Percentage  of  moisture  =  —  -  X  100 

A.  D.  S.  =  air-dry  soil. 
W.  F.  S.  =  water-free  soil. 


(2)  Ammonia  (Distillation) : 

Sulphuric  acid  solution N/I4 

Sodium  hydroxid  solution N/I4 

Indicator,  cochineal  or  methyl-red. 
Magnesium  oxide. 

1.  Transfer  the  culture  to  be  analyzed  to  an  8oo-c.c. 
Kjeldahl  or  a  copper  flask,  using  about  200  c.c.  of  distilled 
water. 

2.  Add  5  grams  of  magnesium  oxid  and  some  shavings  of 
paraffin  to  prevent  foaming. 

3.  Connect  to  a  condenser,  the  lower  end  of  which  is  in 
N/i4  acid. 

141 


142  SOIL   BACTERIOLOGY 

4.  Erlenmeyer  flasks  of  good  quality  should  be  used  to 
collect  the  distillate. 

5.  The  apparatus  for  this  work  differs  from  the  usual 
Kjeldahl  stand  in  that  a  jet  of  steam  is  passed  directly 
into  the  distilling  flask.     It  is  so  arranged  that  the  rubber 
stopper  for  the  Kjeldahl  flask  has  two  holes,  one  for  the 
condensing  bulb  and  one  for  the  steam  tube.     Steam  is 
allowed  to  bubble  slowly  through  the  solution  in  the  bottom 
of  the  Kjeldahl  flasks.     In  order  to  hasten  the  analysis  a 
very  low  flame  should  be  kept  under  the  distilling  flask. 
The  period  of  distillation  will  vary  with  the  amount  of 
ammonia  present.    As  a  rule,  one  hour  is  long  enough  to 
drive  off  all  ammonia  nitrogen. 

6.  If  methyl-red  is  used  as  an  indicator,  the  distillate 
should  be  boiled  for  a  few  minutes,  cooled  to  15°  or  20°  C., 
about  5  drops  of  methyl-red  added,  and  the  solution  titrated. 

7.  The  distillate  is  titrated  with  standard  alkali,  and 
from  the  cubic  centimeters  of  standard  acid  neutralized  by 
the  distillate  the  weight  of  nitrogen  liberated  as  ammonia 
is  calculated. 

(3)  Ammonia  (Nesslerization). — Ammonia-free  Water. — 
This  is  readily  prepared  by  adding  sodium  hydroxid  and 
potassium  permanganate  to  laboratory  water  and  redistil- 
ling. Discard  the  first  portion  of  the  distillate.  After 
about  one-fourth  of  the  water  has  been  evaporated,  the 
subsequent  distillate  will  be  free  of  ammonia.  . 

Standard  Ammonium  Chlorid  Solution. — Dissolve  3.82 
grams  of  ammonium  chlorid  in  1000  c.c.  of  distilled  water; 
dilute  10  c.c.  of  this  to  1000  c.c.  with  ammonia-free  water. 
One  c.c.  equals  o.oi  mg.  of  nitrogen. 

i.  Prepare  a  series  of  sixteen  Nessler's  tubes  which  con- 
tain the  following  number  of  cubic  centimeters  of  the 
standard  ammonium  chlorid  solution,  dilute  to  50  c.c. 


QUANTITATIVE   METHODS    OF   ANALYSIS  143 

with  ammonia-free  water,  namely,  o.o,  o.i,  0.3,  0.5,  0.7, 
i.o,  1.4,  1.7,  2.0,  2.5,  3.0,  3.5,  4.0,  4.5,  5.0,  and  6.0. 

2.  These  will  contain  o.oi  mg.  of  ammonia  nitrogen  for 
each  cubic  centimeter  of  the  standard  solution  used. 

3.  Nesslerize  the  standards  and  also  the  distillates  by 
adding  approximately  2  c.c.  of  Nessler's  reagent  to  each 
tube. 

4.  Do  not  stir  the  contents  of  the  tubes. 

5.  After  Nesslerizing,  allow  the  tubes  to  stand  for  ten 
minutes. 

6.  Compare  the  color  produced  in  these  tubes  with  that 
in  the  standards  by  looking  vertically  downward  through 
them  at  a  white  surface  placed  at  an  angle  in  front  of  a 
window,  so  as  to  reflect  the  light  upward. 

(4)  Nitrates  (Colorimetric) : 

1.  Evaporate  in  a  porcelain  dish  on  a  water-bath  a 
convenient  quantity  of  unknown  nitrate  solution,  depending 
upon  the  amount  of  nitrate  present,  to  dryness. 

2.  When  evaporated,  add  2  c.c.  of  phenoldisulphonic  acid 
and  stir  with  the  rounded  end  of  a  glass  rod  for  about  ten 
minutes  so  as  to  loosen  the  residue. 

Note. — Equations  for  the  action  of  phenoldisulphonic  acid  on  a  nitrate: 
H2SO4    +     2KNO3     =     2HNO3     +     K2SO4 
C6H3(OH)(S03H)2    +     HN03     =     C6H2(OH)  (SO3)2(NO2)     +    H2O 

C6H3(OH)(S03H)2(NO2)     +     3NH4OH     = 

C6H2(ONH4)(S02ONH4)2N02    +     3H2O 

3.  Dilute  with  water  and  add  ammonia  solution  (strong 
ammonium  hydroxid  diluted  with  an  equal  volume  of  water) 
until  alkaline ;  a  yellow  color  is  formed.     This  is  then  diluted 
to  a  known  volume  and  compared  with  the  standard. 

For  example,  take  500  c.c.  of  water  to  100  grams  of  soil, 


144  SOIL  BACTERIOLOGY 

and  in  order  to  clarify  add  about  2  grams  of  calcium  oxid. 
To  secure  a  fair  sample,  mix  by  rubbing  in  a  mortar  or  by 
shaking  in  a  wide-mouthed  bottle.  Filter  through  folded 
filter-paper  until  clear.  Take  a  convenient  volume,  for 
example,  25  c.c.,  and  determine  the  nitrate  present.  This 
is  equal  to  5  grams  of  soil.  Use  the  colorimeter  to  compare 
the  standard  solution  with  the  unknown. 
Formula  for  calculating  results: 


Where  X  =  Number  of  milligrams  of  N  as  NO3  per  100  grams  dry  soil. 
W  =  Weight  of  dry  soil. 
S     =  Cubic  centimeters  of  water  added  to  W. 
A    =  Aliquot  taken  for  evaporation. 

d     =  Number  of  cubic  centimeters  to  which  A  was  diluted. 
K    =  Reading  on  scale  of  standard  solution. 
U    =  Reading  on  scale  of  unknown  solution. 
M  =  Milligrams  of  N  as  NO3  in  i  c.c.  oi  standard  solution  as 
diluted  for  reading. 

Standard  Nitrate  Solution—Dissolve  0.722  gram  of  pure 
dry  potassium  nitrate  in  1000  c.c.  of  water.  Of  this  strong 
solution  dilute  10  c.c.  to  100  c.c.,  and  from  this  take  10  c.c. 
for  a  standard.  Evaporate  to  dryness  in  a  porcelain  dish 
on  a  water-bath  and  treat  as  described  above.  Make  up 
volume  to  100  c.c.  Each  cubic  centimeter  of  this  standard 
is  equal  to  o.ooi  milligram  of  N  as  nitrate,  or  100  c.c.  of 
this  standard  is  equal  to  o.i  milligram  of  nitrogen. 
•  (5)  Nitrates  (Reduction)  : 

i.  Add  to  250  or  500  c.c,  of  aqueous  soil  extract  in  an 
8oo-c.c.  Kjeldahl  flask  5  c.c.  of  a  50  per  cent,  sodium 
hydroxid  solution  ;  partially  close  the  mouth  of  the  flask  with 
a  small  funnel  to  prevent  spattering  and  boil  for  half  an 
hour. 


QUANTITATIVE   METHODS    OF   ANALYSIS  145 

2.  Replace  the  water  driven  off  in  heating. 

3.  When  cool,  add  2  grams  of  finely  divided  Devarda's 
alloy   (about  60  mesh)   and  connect  the  flask  with  the 
distilling  apparatus. 

4.  The  distillation  should  not  be  hurried. 

5.  Allow  the  solution  to  boil  for  thirty  to  sixty  minutes. 
(6)  Total  Nitrogen  Without  Nitrates: 

Sulphuric  acid N/I4 

Sodium  hydroxid N/I4 

Sulphuric  acid  (concentrated). 

Potassium  or  sodium  sulphate. 

Copper  sulphate. 

Pumice  powder. 

Sodium  hydroxid  (50  per  cent.). 

1.  Place  the  substance  to  be  analyzed  in  a  Kjeldahl 
flask  (the  amount  for  analysis  will  depend  on  the  nitrogen 
content) ;  if  soil  is  used,  about  10  grams. 

2.  Add   5   grams   of  powdered   potassium   sulphate   or 
sodium  sulphate,  0.5  gram  copper  sulphate,  30  to  40  c.c. 
of  sulphuric  acid,  and  mix  thoroughly.     It  is  important 
that  the  substance  be  thoroughly  moistened  by  the  sulphuric 
acid  before  heating. 

3.  Place  the  flask  on  the  digestion  shelf  under  a  hood  and 
heat   slowly   until   frothing   ceases.     Avoid   a   very   high 
flame;  do  not  allow  the  flame  to  touch  the  flask  above  the 
part  occupied  by  the  liquid.     If  sugar  is  present,  for  ex- 
ample, mannit  agar  culture,  the  acid  mixture  will  foam 
very  badly.     In  order  to  prevent  any  loss  it  is  well  to  heat 
very  slowly  until  all  foaming  has  ceased.     Sometimes  this 
requires  one  hour  or  more. 

4.  Now  raise  the  heat  (avoid  a  very  hot  flame)  until 
the  acid  boils  rapidly. 

5.  Digest  for  thirty  minutes  after  the  acid  mixture  is 


146  SOIL  BACTERIOLOGY 

colorless.     If  sugar  is  absent,  about  two  to  three  hours  is 
sufficient  for  complete  digestion. 

6.  In  case  the  contents  of  the  flask  are  likely  to  become 
solid  before  digestion  is  complete,  cool,  and  add  10  c.c. 
more  of  sulphuric  acid. 

7.  When  digestion  is  complete,  cool,  and  add  200  c.c. 
of  water.     Shake  until  the  mixture  is  thoroughly  in  solution. 
Be  sure  that  none  of  the  digested  material  remains  caked 
to  the  sides  of  the  Kjeldahl  flask. 

8.  Recool,  add  a  teaspoonful  of  powdered  pumice  to 
prevent  bumping,  and  shake  thoroughly. 

9.  Add  100  c.c.,  or  more  if  necessary,  of  a  saturated  so- 
dium  hydroxid   solution.     (The   stock  solution  of  alkali 
should  be  prepared  two  days  or  more  before  it  is  to  be  used 
in  order  that  the  sodium  carbonate  may  precipitate  out. 
Avoid  the  deposit  in  the  bottom  of  the  alkali.)     Enough 
alkali  should  be  added  to  make  the  solution  react  strongly 
alkaline.     A  few  strips  of  litmus-paper  may  be  added  in 
order  to  test  the  reaction.     The  alkali  should  be  poured 
slowly  down  the  sides  of  the  flask.    After  about  half  of  the 
alkali  is  added,  it  is  well  to  shake  the  solution.     Now  add 
the  remaining  alkali  and  connect  at  once  to  the  condenser. 

10.  See  that  the  rubber  stopper  fits  snugly  in  the  flask. 
Now  mix  the  contents  thoroughly  by  shaking. 

n.  Just  before  connecting  the  flask  have  a  very  low 
flame  burning  on  the  distillation  shelf.  After  the  alkali 
and  acid  mixture  are  well  mixed,  raise  the  flame. 

12.  The   proper   amount   of   standard   acid   should   be 
measured  into  flasks  connected  to  the  distillation  shelf 
prior  to  adding  the  alkali. 

13.  Distil  slowly.    After  the  first  fifteen  minutes  the 
flame  may  be  raised,  but  never  so  high  that  the  distillate 
collects  in  the  condensing  bulbs.     Generally  the  first  two- 


QUANTITATIVE   METHODS    OF   ANALYSIS  147 

thirds  of  the  original  volume  recovered  as  distillate  will 
contain  all  the  ammonia. 

14.  The  distillate  is  now  titrated  with  standard  alkali, 
and  from  the  cubic  centimeters  of  standard  acid  neutralized 
by  the  distillate  the  weight  of  nitrogen  liberated  as  am- 
monia is  calculated. 

15.  This  should  be  reported  as  percentage  of  nitrogen 
on  the  dry  basis. 

(7)  Total  Nitrogen  with  Nitrates  Present: 

Same  as  for  (6);  in  addition: 
Salicylic  acid. 
Sodium  thiosulphate. 

1.  Add  to  the  substance  to  be  analyzed  in  a  Kjeldahl 
flask  35  to  40  c.c.  of  sulphuric  acid  with  salicylic  acid 
(i  gram  in  30  c.c.  of  sulphuric  acid);  shake  until  thoroughly 
mixed  and  allow  to  stand  five  or  ten  minutes,  with  frequent 
shaking. 

2.  Now  add  5  grams  of  crystallized  sodium  thiosulphate 
and  heat  the  solution  gently  for  five  minutes,  then  bring  to 
boiling  for  five  minutes;  cool;  add  0.5   gram  of  copper 
sulphate  and  boil.     This  reduces  the  danger  of  foaming. 

3.  Heat  very  gently  until  foaming  ceases,   then  heat 
strongly    until    colorless.     Continue    boiling    for    thirty 
minutes    after    the    substance    is    colorless.     The    entire 
process  requires  five  to  six  hours. 

4.  Cool  and  add  about  200  c.c.  of  distilled  water. 

5.  Cool  again,  and  add  a  few  pieces  of  granulated  zinc  or 
pumice  powder  to  keep  the  contents  of  the  flask  from  bump- 
ing during  distillation. 

6.  Next  add  100  c.c.  or  more  of  strong  soda  solution 
sufficient  to  make  the  reaction  strongly  alkaline,  pouring  it 
down  the  sides  of  the  flask  so  that  it  does  not  mix  at  once 
with  the  acid. 


148  SOIL   BACTERIOLOGY 

7.  Connect  the  flask  with  the  condenser  (having  prepared 
the  acid  to  receive  the  ammonia).  Mix  the  contents  thor- 
oughly by  shaking,  and  distil  until  all  the  ammonia  has 
passed  over  into  the  standard  acid. 

(8)  Humus: 

1.  Extract  10  grams  of  air-dry  soil  in  a  Gooch  crucible 
with  i  per  cent,  hydrochloric  acid  until  the  nitrate  gives 
no  precipitate  with  ammonium  hydroxid  and  ammonium 
oxalate. 

2.  Wash  until  all  the  acid  is  removed.     In  the  case  of 
clay  soil,  the  washing  should  be  done  chiefly  by  decantation 
from  a  cylinder  or  tall  beaker. 

3.  Wash   the   contents   of   the   crucible    (including   the 
asbestos  filter)  into  a  glass-stoppered  cylinder,  with  500 
c.c.  of  4  per  cent,  ammonium  hydroxid.     (Mix  300  c.c.  of 
water  with  200  c.c.  of  ammonia  (sp.  gr.  .90)  and  add  more 
water  or  ammonia  until  the  hydrometer  reads  .9604,  which 
is  exactly  20  per  cent,  solution  of  ammonium  hydroxid 
(NH4OH).     Dilute  this  to  4  per  cent,  with  water.) 

4.  Allow  to  remain,  with  occasional  shaking,  for  twenty- 
four  hours.     During  this  time  the  cylinder  is  inclined  as 
much  as  possible  without  bringing  the  contents  in  contact 
with  the  stopper,  thus  allowing  the  soil  to  settle  on  the  side 
of  the  cylinder  and  exposing  a  very  large  surface  to  the 
action  of  the  ammonium  hydroxid. 

5.  Place  the  cylinder  in  a  vertical  position  and  leave  for 
twelve  hours  to  allow  the  sediment  to  settle. 

6.  Draw  off  300  c.c.  of  the  supernatant  liquid  with  a 
pipet,  without  stirring  up  the  sediment,  place  in  a  stoppered 
5oo-c.c.  flask,  and  let  stand  for  forty-eight  hours. 

7.  Carefully  pipet  off  200  c.c.  of  the  liquid,  free  of  clay 
particles,  into  a  3oo-c.c.  beaker,  evaporate  it  on  a  steam- 
bath,  and  let  the  residue  heat  on  the  bath  for  two  hours. 


QUANTITALIVE   METHODS    OF   ANALYSIS  149 

8.  Dissolve  out  the  humus  with  200  c.c.  of  4  per  cent, 
ammonium  hydroxid  and  filter  through  paper  to  separate 
the  flocculated  clay. 

9.  Evaporate  50  c.c.  aliquots,  dry  at  100°  C.,  and  weigh. 

10.  Ignite  the  residue  and  reweigh. 

11.  Calculate  the  humus  from  the  difference  in  weights 
between  the  dried  and  ignited  residues. 

12.  Report  as  percentage  of  the  dry  soil. 
(9)  Carbon  Dioxid : 

1.  Connect  a  large  Erlenmeyer  suction  flask  of  about 
2-liter  capacity  with  a  long  glass  tube  by  means  of  a  5o-c.c. 
pipet  bent  as  shown  in  Fig.  10. 

2.  Fill  the  glass  cylinder  about  two-thirds  full  of  glass 
beads  and  10  c.c.  of  normal  potassium  hydroxid.     The 
beads  prevent  the  carbon  dioxid  from  passing  through  the 
alkaline   solution  too  rapidly,   and  afford  much  greater 
surface.     The  5o-c.c.  pipet  prevents  suction  of  the  alkali 
back  into  the  flask. 

3.  Place  i  kilogram  of  soil  in  the  Erlenmeyer  flask. 

4.  Connect  the  5o-c.c.  pipet  to  the  flask  and  close  the 
ends  of  the  glass  tubes  by  means  of  clamps. 

5.  In  order  to  conduct  the  carbon  dioxid  into  the  potas- 
sium hydroxid  solution  draw  a  current  of  air  slowly  through 
the  apparatus  for  ten  to  twenty  minutes  each  day. 

6.  The  current  of  air  should  be  freed  of  carbon  dioxid  by 
passing  through  strong  alkali  or  a  series  of  soda-lime  tubes. 
The  amount  of  air  may  be  determined  by  counting  the 
air  bubbles. 

7.  After  the  carbon  dioxid    has   been  collected  in  the 
potassium    hydroxid,    disconnect    the    suction   flask    and 
transfer  the  contents  of  the  glass  tower  into  a  5oo-c.c. 
Erlenmeyer  flask  by  successive  washings  with  small  portions 
of  carbon-dioxid-free  water.    This  is  easily  accomplished 


SOIL  BACTERIOLOGY 


by  inclining  the  end  of  the  pipet  into  the  flask  and  pouring 
the  wash- water  on  to  the  beads.  Washing  should  be  re- 
peated until  all  traces  of  alkali  have  disappeared.  Place 
a  few  drops  on  a  watch-glass  containing  phenolphthalein. 
If  there  is  no  change  in  color,  the  washing  is  complete. 


Fig.  10. — Apparatus  for  determining  carbon  dioxid. 

Avoid  using  too  large  a  quantity  of  water  for  each  washing, 
otherwise  the  volume  of  liquid  to  titrate  will  be  very  large. 

Note. — Carbon-dioxid-free  water  may  be  prepared  by  drawing  a  current 
of  carbon-dioxid-free  air  through  distilled  water  for  twenty-four  hours  or 
longer. 


QUANTITATIVE    METHODS    OF   ANALYSIS  151 

8.  Now  add  about  6  drops  of  phenolphthalein  to  the 
solution  and  titrate  with  N/2   sulphuric  acid  until  the 
pink  color  begins  to  change.    Care  should  be  taken  not  to 
overtitrate.     In  order  to  secure  the  best  results  titrate  with 
the  tip  of  the  buret  in  the  solution. 

9.  At  this  point,  when  the  carbon  exists  as  acid  carbonate, 
add  5  drops  of  methyl-orange  and  titrate  with  N/io  sul- 
phuric acid  until  the  color  changes. 

10.  Prepare  color  standards  for  each  indicator  by  adding 
to  carbon-dioxid-free  water  the  same  amount  of  the  in- 
dicator as  used  in  titrating. 

11.  The  number  of  cubic  centimeters  of  N/io  sulphuric 
acid  used  during  the  titration  with  methyl-orange  as  an 
indicator,  minus  the  blank,  multiplied  by  1.2,  represents 
the  weight  in  milligrams  of  carbon  produced  as  carbon 
dioxid  from  i  kilogram  of  soil. 

Equation  for  the  double  titration  of  carbon  dioxid: 

2KOH    +     CO2     =     K2CO3    +     H2O 

K2CO3    +    H2SO4     =     KHSO4    +     KHCO3 

KHCO3    +    H2SO4     =     KHSO4    +    H2CO3     =     H2O    +     C02 

(10)  Soil  Acidity: 

Lead  acetate  paper. 

Calcium  chlorid  solution  plus  zinc  sulphid  solution  (2  per  cent,  of 
ZnS  in  20  per  cent.  CaCl2  +  2H2O). 

1.  Place  10  grams  of  the  soil  to  be  analyzed  in  a  3OO-C.C. 
Erlenmeyer  flask. 

2.  Add  50  c.c.  of  a  mixture  of  45  c.c.  of  water  and  5  c.c. 
of  a  well-shaken  suspension   of  zinc   sulphid  in  calcium 
chlorid  solution. 

3.  In  order  to  remove  the  zinc  sulphid  adhering  to  the 
vessel,  refill  with  50  c.c.  of  water  and  add  to  the  flask. 


152  SOIL   BACTERIOLOGY 

4.  Place  the  flask  at  once  over  the  flame  and  boil  for  one 
minute  after  violent  bubbling  starts. 

5.  Now  place  a  strip  of  lead  acetate  paper  moistened  with 
not  more  than  3  drops  of  water  over  the  mouth  of  the  flask. 

6.  Boil  for  two  minutes,  remove,  and  dry  the  paper. 

7.  Compare  the  paper  with  standard  color  chart. 

Truog,  E.,  Bui.  249,  Wis.  Agr.  Exp.  Sta.,  1915. 

(n)  Reducing  Sugars  (Defren-O'Sullivan) : 

1.  Mix  15  c.c.  of  Fehling's  copper  solution  (see  p.  138) 
(a)  with  15  c.c.  of  the  alkaline  tartrate  solution  (b)  in  a 
300-c.c.   Erlenmeyer  flask,   and   add   50  c.c.   of   distilled 
water. 

2.  Place   the  flask  and  its   contents  in   a  water-bath 
containing  boiling  water  and  allow  it  to  remain  five  minutes. 

3.  Then  run  rapidly  from  a  buret  into  the  hot  liquor  in 
the  flask  25  c.c.  of  the  sugar  solution  to  be  tested,  which 
should  contain  not  more  than  |  per  cent,  of  reducing  sugar. 

4.  Allow  the  flask  to  remain  in  the  boiling  water  just 
fifteen  minutes  after  the  addition  of  the  sugar  solution, 
remove,  and,  with  the  aid  of  a  vacuum,  filter  the  contents 
rapidly  through  a  porcelain  Gooch  crucible  containing  a 
layer  of  prepared  asbestos  fiber  about  £  inch  thick,  the 
Gooch,  with  the  asbestos,  having  been  previously  ignited, 
cooled,  and  weighed. 

5.  The  cuprous  oxid  precipitate  is  washed  thoroughly 
with  boiling  distilled  water  until  the  water  ceases  to  be 
alkaline.     The  asbestos  used  should  be  of  the  long-fibered 
variety  and  should  be  especially  prepared  as  follows:   Boil 
first  with  nitric  acid  (sp.  gr.  1.05-1.10),  washing  out  with 
hot  water;  then  boil  with  a  25  per  cent,  solution  of  sodium 
hydroxid;  and  finally  wash  out  the  alkali  with  hot  water. 
Keep  the  asbestos  in  a  wide-mouthed  bottle  and  transfer 


QUANTITATIVE   METHODS    OF   ANALYSIS 


153 


it  to  the  Gooch  by  shaking  it  up  in  the  water  and  pouring 
it  quickly  into  the  crucible  while  under  suction.  The 
excess  of  fine  asbestos  should  be  poured  off  before  adding 
to  crucible. 

6.  Dry  the  Gooch  with  its  contents  in  the  oven,  and 
finally  heat  to  dull  redness  for  fifteen  minutes,  during  which 
the  red  cuprous  oxid  is  converted  into  the  black  cupric 
oxid.     Considerable  care  must  be  taken  to  avoid  cracking 
the  crucible,  the  heat  being  increased  cautiously,  and  the 
operation  conducted  preferably  in  a  muffle  furnace. 

7.  After  oxidation  as  above,  the  crucible  is  transferred  to 
a  desiccator,  cooled,  and  quickly  weighed. 

8.  From  the  milligrams  of  cupric   oxid    calculate   the 
milligrams  of  dextrose  according  to  the  following  table: 

Leech,  Food  Inspection  and  Analysis,  New  York,  p.  595,  1913. 
Dej "ren's  Table  for  Dextrose,  Maltose,  and  Lactose 


Cupric  oxid. 

Dextrose. 

Maltose. 

Lactose. 

Cupric  oxid. 

Dextrose. 

Maltose. 

Lactose. 

Mgm. 

Mgm. 

Mgm. 

Mgm. 

Mgm. 

Mgm. 

Mgm. 

Mgm. 

30 

13.2 

21.7 

18.8 

180 

80.4 

131.8 

114.6 

40 

17.6 

29.0 

25.2 

190 

84.9 

I39.I 

I2I.O 

50 

22.1 

36.2 

31-5 

2OO 

80.5 

146.6 

127-5 

60 

26.5 

43-5 

37-8 

2IO 

94.0 

I54-I 

I34.I 

70 

30.9 

50.8 

44.1 

2  2O 

98.6 

161.5 

I4O.6 

80 

35-4 

58.1 

50.5 

230 

103.1 

169.1 

147.0 

90 

39-9 

65.5 

56.8 

24O 

107.7 

176.6 

153.5 

100 

444 

72.8 

63.2 

250 

112.3 

184.1 

1  60.0 

no 

48.9 

80.  i 

69.5 

260 

116.9 

191.6 

166.5 

1  20 

53-3 

87.4 

75-9 

270 

121.4 

199.2 

173.0 

130 

57.8 

94-8 

82.4 

280 

I26.I 

206.8 

179.6 

140 

62.2 

IO2.I 

88.7 

290 

130.7 

214.3 

186.2 

150 

66.8 

109.5 

95-2 

300 

135-3 

221.9 

192.8 

1  60 

71-3 

Il6.9 

101.7 

310 

139-9 

229.6 

199-3 

170 

75-8 

124.4 

108.2 

320 

144-5 

237-2 

205.9 

154  SOIL  BACTERIOLOGY 

(12)  Hydrogen  Sulphid: 

1.  Prepare  the  following  reagents :  N/ioo  iodin  and  N/ioo 
sodium  thiosulphate.     Standardize  the  iodin  against  the 
thiosulphate  solution.     One  c.c.  of  the  N/ioo  iodin  solution 
is  equivalent  to  0.17  milligram  of  hydrogen  sulphid,  using 
starch  as  an  indicator. 

2.  Add  to  a  large  glass-stoppered  bottle  10  c.c,  of  the 
iodin  solution  and  2  grams  of  potassium  iodid. 

H2S    +    2!    =    2HI    +    S 

3.  Take  1000  c.c.  of  the  sample  to  be  tested,  pour  it  into 
the  large  bottle  containing  the  iodin,  shake  thoroughly,  and 
allow  to  stand  for  some  tune. 

4.  Titrate  the  excess  iodin  with  N/ioo  thiosulphate. 

5.  In  the  presence  of  large  amounts  of  hydrogen  sulphid 
use  tenth-normal  iodin  instead  of  one-hundredth  normal. 

Treadwell,  Analytical  Chemistry,  vol.  ii,  p.  687,  1912. 


SECTION  XI 
SPECIAL  METHODS 

FOR  a  detailed  discussion  of  sterilization  see  one  of  the 
standard  works  on  bacteriologic  technic.  Here  only  special 
phases  of  this  subject  will  be  considered. 

Seed  Sterilization. — Although  a  great  number  of  methods 
employing  various  agents  have  been  recommended  for 
removing  micro-organisms  from  seed,  only  a  few  of  the 
more  promising  ones  will  be  given.  Where  it  is  not  neces- 
sary 'to  render  the  seeds  free  of  bacteria,  but  merely  to 
destroy  the  majority  of  the  flora,  alcohol  may  be  used. 


Fig.  ii. — Apparatus  for  seed  sterilization. 

Among  the  chemicals  that  have  proved  satisfactory  for 
sterilizing  seed,  mercuric  chlorid,  hypochlorate  of  lime,  and 
silver  nitrate  are  the  most  commonly  used.  The  effective- 
ness of  these  substances  depends  on  many  factors:  strength 
of  solution,  time  of  exposure,  temperature,  pressure,  and 
nature  of  the  seed  coat. 

155 


156  SOIL   BACTERIOLOGY 

Mercuric  Chlorid  in  Vacuum : 

1.  Set  up  the  apparatus  shown  in  Fig  n,  using  heavy 
walled  bottles  (milk)  and  heavy  steam-proof  rubber  connec- 
tions. 

2.  Fill  flask  B  with  0.25  per  cent,  solution  of  mercuric 
chlorid  and  C  with  distilled  water. 

3.  After  the  whole  apparatus  is  connected,  the  clamps 
between  bottles  B-D  and    C-D  fastened,  sterilize  in  the 
autoclave  at  10  pounds'  pressure  for  fifteen  minutes. 

4.  Cool  to  40°  C.,  connect  to  a  vacuum  pump,  and  place 
the  seed  in  flask  D.     If  the  seed  are  small,  place  a  layer  of 
cheese-cloth   over   the  mouth   of  bottle   before   inserting 
stopper.      The   seed   should   be   thoroughly  clean  before 
sterilizing.     It  is  well  to  wash  with  60  to  70  per  cent, 
alcohol. 

5.  By  means  of  the  vacuum  pump  draw  the  mercuric 
chlorid  from  B   to  D;  then  close   the  screw-clamp  and 
exhaust  D  for  three  to  five  minutes.     This  should  remove 
the  air  particles  from  around  the  seed  coats  and  allow 
the    disinfectant    to    come    in    direct  contact   with   the 
seed. 

6.  At  the  end  of  this  time  invert  D  and  withdraw  the 
mercuric  chlorid  solution.     Now  run  in  a  small  amount  of 
sterile  water  from  C,  shake  vigorously,  empty,  and  repeat 
this  process  three  or  four  times. 

7.  Remove  some  of  the  seed  to  sterile  Petri  dishes  and 
pour  over  them  a  layer  of  bouillon  agar. 

8.  After  the  agar  hardens,  invert  and  place  in  the  in- 
cubator at  20°  to  25°  C.     In  two  or  three  days  the  seed 
should  germinate.     If  bacteria  or  molds  are  present,  they 
may  be  readily  noted  on  the  agar. 

Hutchinson  and  Miller,  Jour.  Agr.  Sci.,  vol.  iii,  p.  185,  1908. 


SPECIAL   METHODS  157 

Calcium  Hypochlorite: 

1.  Add  10  grams  of  commercial  chlorid  of  lime  (titrating 
28  per  cent,  chlorin)  to  140  c.c.  of  water. 

2.  Allow  the  mixture  to  settle  for  five  or  ten  minutes  and 
decant  the  supernatant  liquid.     This  solution  should  con- 
tain about  2  per  cent,  of  chlorin. 

3.  For  seed  sterilization  the  solution  may  be  diluted  or 
used  full  strength.    The  volume  of  the  liquid  should  be 
about  five  times  that  of  the  seed. 

4.  Place  the  seed  in  a  sterile  test-tube  and  cover  with  a 
i  per  cent,  chlorin  solution  (original  solution  diluted  one- 
half). 

5.  The  time  required  for  sterilizing  varies  with  the  dif- 
ferent seed,  about  six  hours  for  alfalfa,  eight  hours  for 
corn,  and  fifteen  hours  for  wheat. 

Wilson,  J.  K.,  Amer.  Jour.  Bot,  vol.  ii,  pp.  420-427,  1915. 

Silver  Nitrate. — According  to  Schroeder  the  Gramineae 
are  not  readily  penetrated  by  silver  nitrate,  and  withstand 
treatment  with  a  5  per  cent,  solution  for  twelve  to  twenty- 
four  hours.  In  order  to  remove  the  silver  nitrate  wash 
thoroughly  in  a  sodium  chlorid  solution  and  allow  the  seed 
to  stand  in  a  dilute  solution  of  sodium  chlorid  for  twenty- 
four  hours. 

Schroeder,  H.,  Centbl.  Bakt.  (etc.),  Abt.  2,  Bd.  28,  pp.  492-505,  1910. 

Soil  Sterilization. — In  order  to  destroy  all  forms  of 
microorganisms  in  soil  a  high  temperature  for  a  long 
period  of  time  is  required.  It  is  impossible  to  sterilize 
soil  by  the  methods  commonly  employed  for  culture-media. 
Unfortunately,  the  temperature  required  to  kill  bacterial 
spores  in  soil  brings  about  other  changes,  chemical  and 
physical.  In  some  cases  sterilization  results  in  undesirable 


158  SOIL   BACTERIOLOGY 

changes;  in  others  it  seems  to  improve  the  crop-producing 
power  of  the  soil. 

For  a  discussion  of  this  problem  see  the  publications  of 
Richter,  Pickering,  Seaver,  and  others. 

Richter,  Landw.  Vers.  Stat,  Bd.  47,  p.  269,  1896. 

Pickering,  Jour.  Agr.  Sci.,  vol.  ii,  p.  411,  1908;  vol.  iii,  p.  32,  1908. 

Seaver,  Mycologia,  vol.  i,  p.  131,  1909. 

Seaver  and  Clark,  Biochemical  Bui.  No.  9,  p.  413,  1912. 

Lyon  and  Bizzell,  Bui.  275,  Cornell  Exp.  Sta.,  1910. 

Lathrop,  Bui.  89,  Bur.  of  Soils,  U.  S.  Dept.  Agr.,  1912. 

Johnson,  J.,  Science,  vol.  xliii,  pp.  434,  435,  1916. 

Method  for  Sterilizing  Soil: 

1.  Small  test-tubes  of  soil  may  be  sterilized  by  heating 
in  the  autoclave  for  two  hours  on  two  successive  days  at 
15  pounds'  pressure. 

2.  When  it  is  desirable  to  sterilize  much  larger  amounts 
of  soil,  the  time  of  heating  should  be  increased. 

3.  If  earthenware  jars  are  used,  the  cold  air  in  the  bottom 
is  removed  very  slowly,  therefore  it  is  necessary  to  heat  for 
several  hours. 

4.  A  4-liter  earthenware  jar  of  soil  requires  at  least  six 
hours  or  longer  at  15  pounds'  pressure  to  kill  all  forms  of 
bacteria. 

Growing  Plants  Free  of  Microorganisms. — The  method 
to  follow  in  growing  plants  free  of  bacteria  depends  largely 
upon  two  factors:  the  size  of  the  plant  and  the  time  of 
growing  period.  If  small  plants  are  used — clover,  alfalfa, 
etc. — and  it  is  not  necessary  to  grow  to  maturity,  large 
test-tubes  or  glass  cylinders  may  be  used. 

Kellerman,  K.  F.,  Cir.  120,  U.  S.  Dept.  Agr.  Bur.  Plant  Ind.,  1913. 

In  order  to  grow  plants  for  a  long  period  of  time  in  a 
medium  free  from  infection  a  vessel  of  special  design  is 


SPECIAL   METHODS 


159 


necessary.  Although  there  are  a  great  number  of  vessels 
designed  for  this  purpose,  only  one  will  be  described.  It 
is  obvious  from  the  start  that  apparatus  of  this  nature 
must  be  somewhat  complicated.  A  modification  of  the 
Schulze  and  Schulow  methods  has  been  found  fairly  satis- 
factory. 

Apparatus: 

One  large  Woulfe's  bottle,  about  3-liter  capacity,  with  three  openings. 

One  large  2-  or  3-liter  flask,  Erlenmeyer  form. 

Two  U  tubes. 

One  cylinder  constructed  as  shown  in  Fig.  13. 

The  apparatus  is  arranged  according  to  Fig.  12. 

Schulow,  I.,  Ber.  d.  Dent.  Bot.  Gesell.,  Bd.  29,  p.  504,  1911. 
Schulze,  C.,  Landw.  Jahrb.,  Bd.  30,  p.  327,  1901. 


Fig.  12. — Complete  apparatus  for  growing  plants  free  of  bacteria. 


All  stoppers  and  connecting  tubes  should  be  made  of 
steam-resistant  rubber.  The  U  tube  A  and  the  long 
hard-glass  tube  B,  enlarged  at  one  end  for  sterile  cotton 


l6o  SOIL   BACTERIOLOGY 

and  stopper,  serve  io  remove  any  micro-organisms  from  the 
air.  If  a  liquid  medium  is  used,  the  aeration  tubes  A  and 
B  may  be  omitted.  A'  and  B'  are  prepared  in  the  same 
way  as  A  and  B.  The  tubes  A',  B',  D,  and  C  are  used  to 
carry  water  over  from  the  flask  to  Woulfe's  bottle. 

Prior  to  filling  the  Woulfe  bottle  with  soil  wrap  some 
glass-wool  around  the  end  of  tube  B,  and  cover  the  bottom 
of  the  bottle  with  an  inch  layer  of  gravel.  Now  add  the 
soil  and  raise  the  water  content  to  about  half -saturation. 
The  special  glass  cylinder  E  which  fits  loosely  around  the 
middle  neck  of  Woulfe's  bottle  consists  of  a  large  glass 
cylinder  4  to  5  cm.  in  diameter  and  15  cm.  in  length.  With- 
in this  cylinder  there  is  a  glass  tube  about  ii  to  ij  cm. 
in  diameter  and  20  cm.  long,  which  reaches  to  the  wire  net 
(see  Fig.  13).  The  top  of  the  glass  tube  carries  a  cotton 
plug.  Between  the  two  cylinders  there  is  loose  cotton 
packing  and  three  glass  rods  about  0.4  cm.  in  diameter  and 
15  cm.  long  (see  Fig.  13). 

The  entire  apparatus  should  be  connected  as  shown  in 
Fig.  12;  the  flask  filled  almost  full  of  distilled  water,  a 
screw-clamp  fastened  between  C  and  D  in  order  to  prevent 
the  water  in  the  flask  from  flowing  over  into  the  bottle,  and 
sterilized  for  two  hours  at  15  pounds'  steam  pressure  for 
two  consecutive  days.  If  carefully  wrapped  in  paper, 
heated  and  cooled  slowly,  there  is  not  much  danger  of 
cracking  the  glass.  When  cool,  seal  all  stoppers  with  a 
beeswax-rosin  mixture. 

In  view  of  the  long  time  required  for  plant  growth  and 
the  danger  of  infection,  it  is  well  to  keep  the  cultures  in  a 
clean  room  as  free  from  contamination  as  possible. 

To  plant,  remove  the  cotton  plug  from  the  inner  glass 
cylinder  or  tube  (see  Fig.  13),  and  by  means  of  sterilized 
forceps  drop  the  seed  down  the  inner  tube  on  the  wire  net. 


SPECIAL   METHODS 


161 


As  soon  as  the  young  shoots  are  5  to  10  cm.  long,  raise  the 
inner  glass  tube  slightly  (Fig.  13,  B)  and  push  the  cotton 
firmly  around  the  base  of  the  young  shoot.  This  should 


. ^ 


A  /     f    B  f    i  C 

Fig.  13. — Apparatus  for  growing  seedlings  free  of  bacteria. 

be  repeated  two  or  three  times  until  there  is  a  cotton 
plug  of  3  to  5  cm.  around  the  shoot.  Now  remove  the 
inner  cylinder,  excess  cotton,  and  glass  rods. 


162 


SOIL  BACTERIOLOGY 


Conversion  of  Degrees  of  Temperature  on  One  Scale  to  Another 
Degrees  C.  X  1.8  +  32  =  Degrees  F. 

F.-32 


Degrees 


1.8 


Degrees  C. 


Comparison  of  Metric  and  English  Units 
Lengths 


Millimeters  to  inches. 


Inches  to  millimeters. 


0.03937 
0.07874 

0.11811 
0.15748 
0.19685 
0.23622 
0.27559 
0.31496 
0-35433 


25.4001 

50.8001 

76.2002 

101.6002 

127.0003 

152.4003 

177.8004 

203.2004 

228.6005 


Cubic  centimeters  to  liquid  ounces. 


Capacities 


Liquid  ounces  to  cubic  centimeters. 


0.03381 
0.06763 

o.ioi44 
0.13526 
0.16907 

0.20288 

0.23670 
0.27051 

0.30432 


1  = 

2  = 

3  = 

4  = 

5  = 

6  = 

7  = 

8  = 

9  = 


29-574 

59-147 

88.721 

118.295 

147-869 

177.442 

207.016 

236.590 

266.163 


Masses 


Grams  to  Avoirdupois  ounces. 


1  = 

2  = 

4  = 

5  = 

6  = 

7  = 

8  = 

9  = 


0.03527 
0.07055 
0.10582 
0.14110 
0.17637 
0.21164 
0.24692 
0.28219 
0.31747 


Avoirdupois  ounces  to  grams. 


1  = 

2  = 

3  = 

4  = 

5  = 

6  = 

7  = 

8  = 

9  = 


28.3495 

56.6991 

85.0486 

113.3981 

141.7476 

170.0972 

198.4467 

226.7962 

255-I457 


SPECIAL   METHODS 


163 


Avoirdupois  pounds  to  kilograms.                         Kilograms  to  Avoirdupois  pounds. 

I 

= 

0-45359 

i      = 

2.20462 

2 

= 

0.90718 

2         = 

4.40924 

3 

= 

1.36078 

3       = 

6.61387 

4 

= 

1.81437 

4      = 

8.81849 

5 

= 

2.26796 

5      = 

11.02311 

6 

= 

2.72155 

6      = 

13.22773 

7 

= 

3.I75I5 

7      = 

15-43236 

8 

= 

3.62874 

8      = 

17.63698 

9 

= 

4.08233 

9      = 

19.84160 

Steam  Pressures  and  Their  Corresponding  Temperatures 

Steam 
pressure.  .  Temperature. 


Pounds, 
o 

I 
2 

3 
4 
5 
6 

7 
8 

9 
10 
ii 

12 
13 
14 
15 
2O 

25 
30 
40 


Centigrade  (°). 
IOO.O 
IO2.4 
104.1 
105.8 
107.3 

108.8 
110.3 
111.7 
113.0 
II4-3 
II5-5 
116.8 
118.4 
119.0 

I2O.O 
121. 2 
126.1 
130.6 
134.6 
140.9 


164 


SOIL  BACTERIOLOGY 


c>  -3- r>-  TJ-  M  N  coco  qoqioto<NqTttoqwqioq^q  q  <-oo 
c^  to  M  o  ^~  doo  j^  co  x>.  oj  M  t^.  d  ^~  c-i  oo  d-oo  ^oo  M  o  ^  ON  to  o 
qoo  q  toTj-t^-w  o  <NOO  coco  IN  to  o  coo  M  ^oo  co  to  co  t^-  ex)  o  o^ 

.............. '.'. . . . . . '.  ,1 }  M 

' 

CO 
If 

>•£?          co  HH    ^- ^O    CO  to  cs    O^  t^>O    "^i"  ^d"  "^i"  O  O    ^"  d  CO    CN    ri"  O  O  O    M    to  O  O  O 
J,»        O          M    c.    ON  XOOO    -- 

^ 

!; 

I     O  .  

'  5 


co  O  t~~  <N   O   M  r-~       too 

<NGO  q\coq  q  c>^oq  q  q  <N  TJ- 

w   d  cs    CN    o   ^   O  to 


o  I-CXD 

<N    COJ>-rOO 

M  M<N 


q  co  q\  to  H  cj 

M    lOO    t^          O\ 


INDEX 


ACIDITY  in  soil,  determination  of,  151 
Actinomycetes,  agar  for,  122 

solution  for,  122 
Agar  for  preserving  plates,  126 
nutrient,  92 

to  clear',  93 
washed,  105 

Alcohol  for  denitrifying  solution,  107 
Alfalfa  plant  with  nodules,  70 

with  and  without  bacteria,  71 
Algae,  solution  for,  123 
Ammonia,  determination  of,  distilla- 
tion, 141,  142 
Nesslerization,  142,  143 
Ammonification  by  pure  cultures,  46 
effect  of  depth  on  rate,  42 
of  limestone  on  rate,  44 
of  moisture  on  rate,  43 
of  potassium  phosphate  on  rate, 

45 

of  soil  type  on  rate,  41 
of  blood-meal,  39 
of  casein,  39 
of  clover  hay,  39 
of  gelatin,  38 
of  urea,  35,  36 

Ammonifiers,  isolation  of,  39 
Ammonium  sulphate,  nitrification  of, 

5i 
Anaerobic  jar,  133 

nitrogen  fixation,  66 

fixing  organisms,  isolation  of,  66 
Aniline  oil  gentian- violet,  128 


Apparatus  for  determining  catalytic 
power  of  soils,  33 

for  one  student,  1 1 
Artificial  cultures  for  inoculation  of 

legumes,  73 
Ashby's  solution,  108 
Asparagin-dextrose  agar,  95 
Atomic  weights,  164 
Azotobacter,  formation  of  pigment, 

65 
influence  of  various  culture-media 

on  growth,  65 
isolation  of,  61 
nitrogen  fixation  by   pure   culture 

of,  64 

relation  to  oxygen,  65 
stained  with  methylene-blue,  62 

BACILLUS  coli,  57 
Hartlebii,  57 
pyocyaneus,  57 

radicicola,  effect  of,  on  growth  and 
nitrogen  content  of  alfalfa,  71, 
72 

from  alfalfa,  68 
from  clover,  67 
gum  formation,  73 
isolation  from  different  legumes, 

67 

nitrogen  fixation  in  solution,  72 
radiobacter,  62 
subtilis,  46 
tumescens,  46 

165 


1 66 


INDEX 


Bacteria,  counting,  16-20 
effect  of  cultivation  on  number  of, 

3i 

of  depth  on  number  of,  22,  23 
of  limestone  on  number  of ,  27,  28 
of  manures  on  number  of,  25,  26 
of  moisture  on  number  of,  24,  25 
of  partial  sterilization  on  number 

of,  28,  29 

of  plant  roots  on  number  of,  29 
of  season  on  number  of,  30 
iron  precipitating,  84 
nitrogen  content  of,  74 
number,     according     to     dilution 

method,  16 
to  plate  method,  18 
in  artificial  cultures  for  inoculat- 
ing legumes,  73 
Bean  extract,  in 
Berkefeld  filter,  37 
Biuret  reaction,  140 
Blank,  25 

Blood-meal,  ammonification,  39 
Bouillon,  89,  90 

nitrate,  106 
Brucin  reagent,  137 

CAFFEIN  agar,  no 

effect  on  nodules,  72 
Calcium  carbonate  for  soil  acidity,  27 
Capsule  stain,  130 
Carbol-fuchsin,  127 
Carbon  bisulphid,  effect  of,  on  num- 
ber of  bacteria,  28 

cycle,  75-80 

dioxid,  determination  of,  149-151 
formation  of,  from  organic  sub- 
stances, 78 
Casein,  agar,  94 

ammonification  of,  39 

nitrification  of,  51 

solution,  98 
Catalase,  32-34 


Catalytic  power  of  soils,  32-34 
Cellulose,  agar,  113 

bacteria,  isolation  of,  77 

fermentation  by  denitrifying  bac- 
teria, 77 

in  impure  cultures,  75 
in  soil,  76 
solution  for,  112 

fermenting  molds,  solution  for,  113 

hydra  ted,  113 
Centigrade  scale,  162 
Chlamydothrix,  solution    for    isolat- 
ing, 118 

threads,  85 
Ciliates,  growth,  18 
Citric  acid  reagent,  138 
Cleaning  glassware,  88 
Clostridium  pasteurianum,  66 
Clover,  agar,  122 

bacteria,  67 

hay,  ammonification  of,  39 
Cochineal  134 
Collodion  sacs,  104 
Colonies,  spreading,  20 
Control,  25 

Counting  bacteria,  16-20 
Crenothrix,  method  for  growing,  84 

threads,  85 
Crone's  solution,  125 
Cultivation,  effect  of,  on  number  of 

bacteria,  31 

Culture-media,  comparison  of  num- 
ber of  bacteria  on  different,  21 

filtration  of,  92 

neutralization  of ,  90,  91 

preparation  of,  89-126 

reaction  of,  90,  91 

titration  of,  90,  91 

DENITRIFICATION  by  pure  cultures, 

57,58 

in  inorganic  solutions,  60 
in  soil,  59 


INDEX 


i67 


Denitrification    with    formation    of 

nitrous  oxid,  58 
Denitrifying  bacteria,   fermentation 

of  cellulose,  77 
isolation  of,  55 
organisms,  reduction  of  stains  by, 

56 
solution,  106 

inorganic,  108 

Depth,  effect  of,  on  number  of  bac- 
teria, 22,  23 
Dextrpse  and  nitrate  reduction,  59 

solution,  109 

Dilution   method  of   counting   bac- 
teria, 1 6 
protozoa,  17 
Diphenylamin  reagent,  137 

EGG-ALBUMEN,  93 

English  units,  162,  163 

Enrichment  cultures,  Azotobacter,  61 

cellulose,  77 

denitrifying,  55 

nitrifying,  50 

FAHRENHEIT  scale,  162 
Fehling's  reagents,  138 
Fermentation  of  cellulose  by  denit- 
rifying bacteria,  77 
in  impure  cultures,  75 
in  soil,  76 

Filter,  Berkefeld,  37 
for  culture-media,  92 
paper  for  denitrifying  solution,  107 
in  fermentation  of  cellulose,  75 
Fixation  of  nitrogen  in  soil,  62 

in  solution,  61 
Flagella  stain,  Loffler's,  130,  131 

Zettnow's,  131,  132 
Formulae,  88-126 
Fuller's  scale,  90 
Fungi,  agar,  121 

solution  for,  120,  121 


GALLIONELLA,  86 
Gelatin,  91 

ammonification  of,  38 

for  sulphate  reduction,  116 

soil  extract,  95 

solution,  98 
Gentian- violet,  127 
Giltay's  solution,  106 
Glassware,  cleaning,  88 
Gram's  iodin  solution,  127 

stain,  129 
Gypsum  blocks,  105 

HANGING-DROP,  61 
Hay  egg-albumen,  97 

infusion,  97 
Hay-soil  extract,  97 
Heyden-Nahrstoff  agar,  93 
Higher  plants,  solution  for,  124 
Hippuric  acid,  100 
Hopkins  and  Pettit  solution,  124,  125 
Humus,  determination  of,  148 

formation  of,  79 
Hydrogen  peroxid,  34 

sulphid,  determination  of,  154 
organisms,  isolation  of,  82 
solution  for  its  formation  from 
protein  and  sulphur,  117 

INCUBATION  of  plates,  20 
Indol  and  skatol,  139 
Iron  cycle,  84-86 
Iron-precipitating  bacteria,  84 

agar  for  isolation  of,  119 
Isolation  of  ammonifiers,  39 

of  Azotobacter,  61 

of  Bacillus  radicicola  from  different 
legumes,  67 

of  cellulose  fermenting  bacteria,  77 

of  chlamydothrix,  118 

of  clostridiae,  66 

of  denitrifying  bacteria,  55 

of  hydrogen  sulphid  organisms,  82 


i68 


INDEX 


Isolation  of  nitrifying  bacteria,  50 
of  urea  fermenting  organisms,  36,37 

Iterson's  solution  for  cellulose  fer- 
mentation, 112 

LABELING  slides,  1 29 

Laboratory  rules,  14,  15 

Lactic  acid  for  casein  agar  plates,  21 

Lactose,  effect  of,  on  growth  of  Azoto- 

bacter,  65 
Legumes,  artificial  cultures  for  the 

inoculation  of,  73 
Lieske's  solution,  108 
Limestone,  effect  of,  on  number  of 

bacteria,  27,  28 
Literature,  12,  13 
LofEer's  methylene-blue,  127 

MALTOSE  solution,  1 10 

Mannit,  effect  of,  on  growth  of  Azoto- 

bacter,  65 

for  nitrogen  fixation,  63 
solution,  1 08 

Manure,  effect  of,  on  number  of  bac- 
teria, 25,  26 

Meissner's  solution,  128 

Mercuric  chlorid,  140 

Methods,  127-163 

Methylene-blue  for  reduction,  56 

Methyl-orange,  133 

Methyl-red,  134 

Metric  units,  162,  163 

Microorganisms  in  soil,  16 
relation  of,  to  physical  properties 
of  soil,  87 

Millon's  reagent,  139 

Moisture,  determination  of,  141 
effect  of,  on  number  of  bacteria, 
24,  25 

NESSLER'S  reagent,  135 
Neutralization  of  culture-media,  90, 


Nitrate  bouillon,  106 
formation,  47-49 
reducing  bacteria,  55 

colonies  on  starch  agar,  55 
reduction  by  pure  cultures,  57,  58 

solution  for,  106 
solution,  101 
Nitrates,    determination    of,    colori- 

metric,  143 
reduction,  144 
Nitrification  of  ammonium  sulphate, 

casein,  51 

effect  of  limestone  on,  54 
of  moisture  on,  53 
of  soil  type  on,  52 
in  solution,  47-50 
Nitrifying  bacteria,  isolation  of,  50 
Nitrite  formation,  47 

and  nitrate  solution,  101 
solution  for,  100 
Nitrogen  content  of  bacteria,  74 
cycle,  35-74 

determination  of,  total,  with  ni- 
trates, 147,  148 
without  nitrates,  145-147 
fixation,  anaerobic  (clostridiae) ,  66 
by  Bacillus  radicicola,  72 
by  pure  cultures,  64 
in  soil,  62 
in  solution,  61 
Nodules,  formation  of,  69 
Number    of    bacteria    in    artificial 

legume  cultures,  73,  74 
Nutrient  broth,  89,  90 

OMELIANSKI'S  solution  for  cellulose 
fermentation,  in 

PARTIAL  sterilization,   effect  of,  on 
number  of  bacteria,  28,  29 

Pasteurized  soil,  66 

Peptone  saccharose  solution,  1 1 1 
solution,  98 


INDEX 


169 


Phenolphthalein,  133 
Phenolsulphonic  acid,  138 
Phosphate  dissolving  bacteria,  solu- 
tion for,  119 
Pigment  formation  with  Azotobacter, 

65 

Plant  food  without  nitrogen,  72 
roots,  effect  of,  on  number  of  bac- 
teria, 29 

Plants,  to  grow,  free  of  microorgan- 
isms, 158-161 

Plate  method  of  counting  bacteria, 
18 

Potato  agar,  121 

Preserving  plants,  140 

Protozoa,  dilution  method  of  count- 
ing, 17 

Pure    cultures,   ammonification   by, 
46 

Pyrogallic  acid  for  absorbing  oxygen, 
133 

RAISIN  extract,  120 

Reaction  of  culture-media,  90,  91 

Reductase,  56 

Reduction  of  nitrates,  55 

to  nitrites,  55 

to  nitrous  oxid,  58 
of  sulphates,  81 
Root  nodules,  69 
Rules,  laboratory,  14,  15 

SACCHAROSE  solution,  no 

Sampling  soil,  16 

Seal  for  bottles,  140 
for  museum  jars,  140 

Season,  effect  of,  on  number  of  bac- 
teria, 30 

Sea- water,  126 

Seed  sterilization,  155-157 

Shive's  solution,  125,  126 

Silicate  jelly,  partially  dialyzed,  104 
undialyzed,  102,  103 


Sodium  asparaginate  agar,  96 

silicate,  102 
Soil  acidity,  determination  of,  151 

apparatus   for  determining    cata- 
lytic power  of,  33 

catalytic  power  of,  32-34 

directions  for  drawing  samples  of, 
16 

microorganisms  in,  16 

pasteurized,  66 

sterilization,  157,  158 

suspension  of,  38 

water,  movement  of,  87 
Soil-extract  agar,  94 

culture-media,  no 

for  protozoa,  97 

gelatin,  95 

stock  solution,  95 
Spore  stain,  129 
Spirophyllum,  86 

method  for  growing,  84 
Spreading  colonies,  20 
Stains,  how  to  use,  128 
Starch  agar,  115 

nitrate  agar,  107 
Steam  pressure,  163 
Sterilization,    partial,    effect   of,   on 

number  of  bacteria,  28,  29 
Sugars,  determination  of,  152,  153 
Sulphanilic  reagent,  136 
Sulphate  reduction,  solution  for,  116, 

117 

Sulphur  cycle,  81-83 
Sulphuric    acid,    standard    solution, 

134,  i35 

TABLES,  162,  163 

Thermophilic  bacteria,  occurrence  of, 

3i 
Thiosulphates,  oxidation  of,  83 

solution  for  oxidation  of,  118 
Thread  bacteria,  solution  for,  118 
Titration  of  culture-media,  90,  91 


170 


INDEX 


Tollen's  solution,  1 24 
Trommsdorf  s  reagent,  136 
Turmeric  paper,  37 

UREA,  ammonification  of,  35,  36 
gelatin,  99 
solution,  98,  99 

Urea-ammonium  nitrate  agar,  96 
Urea-fermenting  organisms,  crystals 

around,  37 
isolation  of,  36,  37 


Urease,  preparation  of,  37 
Uric  acid,  100 

WASHED  agar,  105 
Water  blanks,  19 

Weights,  conversion  tables,  162,  163 
Winogradsky's  solution  for  nitrogen 
fixing  bacteria,  109 

YEASTS,  solution  for,  119 
Yeast-water,  120 


PUBLISHED  BY 


COMPANY 


West  Washington  Square  Philadelphia 

London  :  9,  Henrietta  Street,  Covent  Garden 


Laboratory  Manual  and  Text-Book  of  Embryology.  By  CHARLES 
W.  PRENTISS,  A.  M.,  Ph,  D.,  formerly  Professor  of  Microscopic 
Anatomy  in  the  Northwestern  University  Medical  School,  Chi- 
cago. Large  octavo  of  400  pages,  with  368  illustrations,  many  in 
colors.  Cloth,  $3.75  net. 

This  aew  work  on  Embryology  is  both  laboratory  manual  and  descrip- 
tive text-book.  It  is  the  only  recent  single  volume  describing  the 
chick  and  pig  embryos  usually  studied  in  the  laboratory,  giving  you  as 
well  a  concise,  systematic  account  of  human  embryology.  The  descrip- 
tions of  the  chick  and  pig  embryos  to  be  studied  in  the  laboratory  cover 
over  100  pages  and  are  illustrated  with  732  instructive  illustrations, 
most  of  them  original. 

Dr.  J.  W.  Papez,  Atlanta  Medical  College:  "It  is  the  only  book  that 
has  fulfilled  my  needs  exactly.  I  am  using  the  book  this  session  and 
will  continue  to  use  it  in  the  future." 


Introduction  to  Neurology.  By  C.  JUDSON  HERRICK,  Ph.  D.,  Pro- 
fessor of  Neurology  in  the  University  of  Chicago.  12  mo  of  360 
pith  137  illustrations.  Cloth,  $1.75  net. 


This  work  will  help  the  student  to  organize  his  knowledge  and  to 
appreciate  the  significance  of  the  nervous  system  as  a  working  mechan- 
ism. It  presents  the  actual  inner  workings  of  the  nervous  mechanisms 
in  terms  that  he  can  understand  at  the  very  beginning  of  his  course  in 
psychology,  general  zoology,  comparative  anatomy,  and  general 
medicine. 


Saunders'  College  Text-Books 


Biology:  General  and  Medical.  By  JOSEPH  McFARLAND,  M.  D., 
Professor  of  Pathology  and  Bacteriology,  Medico-Chirurgical  Col- 
lege. i2mo  of  457  pages,  illustrated.  Cloth,  $1.75  net. 

New  (ad)  Edition. 

This  work  is  particularly  adaptable  to  the  requirements  of  scientific 
courses.  There  are  chapters  on  the  origin  of  life  and  its  manifesta- 
tions, the  cell  and  cell  division,  reproduction,  ontogenesis,  conformity 
to  type,  divergence,  structural  and  blood  relationship,  parasitism,  mu- 
tilation and  regeneration,  grafting,  senescence,  etc. 
Prof.  W.  R.  McConnell,  Pennsylvania  State  College:  "It  has  some 
admirable  features,  the  most  valuable  of  which  is  the  careful  resume  of 
the  subjects  of  heredity  and  evolution." 


Invertebrate  Zoology.  By  OILMAN  A.  DREW,  Ph.  D.,  Assistant  Di- 
rector of  the  Marine  Biological  Laboratory,  Woods  Hole,  Mass. 
1  2mo  of  213  pages.  Cloth,  $1.25  net.  New  (zd)  Edition. 

Professor  Drew's  work  gives  the  student  a  working  knowledge  of  com- 
parative anatomy  and  leads  him  to  an  appreciation  of  the  adaptation 
of  the  animals  to  their  environments.  It  is  a  practical  work,  express- 
ing the  practical  knowledge  gained  through  experience.  The  type 
method  of  study  has  been  followed. 

Prof.  John  M.  Tyler,  Amherst  College:  "It  covers  the  ground  well, 
is  «lear  and  very  compact.  The  table  of  definitions  is  excellent." 


Economic  Zoology.  By  L.  S.  DAUGHERTY,  M.  S.,  Ph.  D.,  Professor 
of  Science,  Missouri  Wesleyan  College;  and  M.  C.  DAUGHERTY. 
Part  I  —  Field  and  Laboratory  Guide:  12010  of  237  pages,  inter- 
leaved. Cloth,  $1.25  net.  Part  II—  Principles:  I2mo  of  406 
pages,  illustrated.  Cloth,  $2.00  net. 

Not  only  does  this  work  give  the  salient  facts  of  structural  zoology  and 
the  development  of  the  various  branches,  but  also  the  natural  history 
—  the  life  and  habits.  It  emphasizes  the  economic  phase  throughout. 

Prof.  V.  E.  Shelf  ord,  University  of  Chicago:  "It  has  many  merits 
and  is  the  best  book  of  the  kind  on  the  market." 


Saunders*  College  Text-Books 


Nutritional  Physiology.  By  PERCY  G.  STILES,  Assistant  Professor 
of  Physiology  at  Harvard  University.  i2mo  of  288  pages, 
illustrated.  Cloth,  $1.25  net.  New  (zd)  Edition. 

Dr.  Stiles'  new  work  takes  up  each  organ,  each  secretion  concerned  in 
the  process  of  digestion,  discussing  the  part  each  plays  in  the  physiol- 
ogy of  nutrition  —  in  the  transformation  of  energy.  In  fact,  the  key- 
note of  the  book  throughout  is  "  energy"  —  its  source  and  its  conserva- 
tion. f  The  illustrations  and  homely  similes  are  noteworthy. 

Prof.  M.  E.  Jaffa,  University  of  California:  "  The  presentation  of  the 
matter  is  excellent  and  can  be  understood  by  all." 


The  Nervous  System  and  Its  Conservation.  By  PERCY  GOLDTHWAIT 
STILES,  Assistant  Professor  of  Physiology  at  Harvard  University. 
i2mo  of  230  pages,  illustrated.  Cloth,  $1.25  net. 

Prof.  Stiles'  wonderful  faculty  of  putting  scientific  things  in  language 
within  the  grasp  of  the  non-medical  reader  is  nowhere  better  illustrated 
than  in  this  book.  He  has  a  way  of  conveying  facts  accurately  with 
rifle-ball  precision.  This  new  book  is  really  a  physiology  and  anatomy 
of  the  nervous  system,  emphasizing  the  means  of  conserving  nervous 
energy. 


Human  Physiology.  By  PERCY  GOLDTHWAIT  STILES,  Assistant 
Professor  of  Physiology  at  Harvard  University.  i2mo  of  400 
pages,  illustrated.  Cloth,  $1.50  net. 

This  new  physiology  is  particularly  adapted  for  high  and  normal 
schools  and  general  colleges.  It  presents  the  accepted  facts  concisely 
with  only  a  limited  description  of  the  experiments  by  which  these  facts 
have  been  established.  It  is  written  by  a  teacher  who  has  not  lost  the 
point  of  view  of  elementary  students.  Professor  Stiles  has  a  unique 
and  forceful  way  of  writing.  He  has  the  faculty  of  making  clear,  even 
to  the  unscientific  reader,  physiologic  processes  more  or  less  difficult 
of  comprehension.  This  he  does  by  the  use  of  happy  teaching  devices. 
The  illustrations  are  as  simple  as  the  text. 


Saunders'  College  Text-Books 


oim  ftk® 


The  Horse  in  Health  and  Disease.  By  FREDERICK  B.  HADLEY, 
D.  V.  M.,  Associate  Professor  of  Veterinary  Science,  University 
of  Wisconsin.  i2mo  of  260  pages,  illustrated.  Cloth,  $1.50  net. 


This  new  work  correlates  the  structure  and  function  of  each  organ  of 
the  body,  and  shows  how  the  hidden  parts  are  related  to  the  form, 
movements,  and  utility  of  the  animal.  Then,  in  another  part,  you  get 
a  concise  discussion  of  the  causes,  methods  of  prevention,  and  effects 
of  disease.  The  book  is  designed  especially  as  an  introductory  text  to 
the  study  of  veterinary  science  in  agricultural  schools  and  colleges. 


Poultry  Culture,  Sanitation,  and  Hygiene.  By  B.  F.  KAUPP,  M.  S., 
D.  V.  M.,  Poultry  Investigator  and  Pathologist,  North  Carolina 
Experiment  Station.  i2mo  of  417  pages,  with  107  illustrations. 

Cloth,  $2.00  net. 

This  work  gives  you  the  breeds  and  varieties  of  poultry,  hygiene  and 
sanitation,  ventilation,  poultry-house  construction,  equipment,  ridding 
stock  of  vermin,  internal  parasites,  and  other  diseases.  You  get  the 
gross  anatomy  and  functions  of  the  digestive  organs,  food-stuffs,  com- 
pounding rations,  fattening,  dressing,  packing,  selling,  care  of  eggs, 
handling  feathers,  value  of  droppings  as  fertilizer,  caponizing,  etc.,  etc. 


Lysack's  Dn§dsi§^§  ©ff  Swmd 

Diseases  of  Swine.  With  Particular  Reference  to  Hog-Cholera. 
By  CHARLES  F.  LYNCH,  M.  D.,  D.  V.  S.,  Terre  Haute  Veterinary 
College.  With  a  chapter  on  Castration  and  Spaying,  by  GEORGE 
R.  WHITE,  M.  D.,  D.  V.  S.,  Tennessee.  Octavo  of  741  pages, 
illustrated.  Cloth,  $5.00  net. 

You  get  first  some  80  pages  on  the  various  breeds  of  hogs,  with  valu- 
able points  in  judging  swine.  Then  comes  an  extremely  important 
monograph  of  over  400  pages  on  hog-cholera,  giving  the  history,  causes, 
pathology,  types,  and  treatment.  Then,  in  addition,  you  get  complete 
chapters  on  all  other  diseases  of  swine. 


Saunders'  College  Text-Books 


Veterinary  Bacteriology.  By  ROBERT  E.  BUCHANAN,  Ph.  D., 
Professor  of  Bacteriology  in  the  Iowa  State  College  of  Agriculture 
and  Mechanic  Arts.  Octavo  of  516  pages,  214  illustrations. 

Professor  Buchanan's  new  work  goes  minutely  into  the  consideration 
of  immunity,  opsonic  index,  reproduction,  sterilization,  antiseptics, 
biochemic  tests,  culture  media,  isolation  of  cultures,  the  manufacture 
of  the  various  toxins,  antitoxins,  tuberculins,  and  vaccines. 
B.  F.  kaupp,  D.  V.  S.,  State  Agricultural  College,  Fort  Collins:  "  It  is 
the  best  in  print  on  the  subject.  What  pleases  me  most  is  that  it  con- 
tains all  the  late  results  of  research." 


Anatomy  of  Domestic  Animals.  By  SEPTIMUS  SISSON,  S.  B.,  V.  S., 
Professor  of  Comparative  Anatomy,  Ohio  State  University.  Octavo 
of  930  pages,  725  illustrations.  Cloth,  $7.00  net.  New  (zd)  Edition. 

Here  is  a  work  of  the  greatest  usefulness  in  the  study  and  pursuit  of 
the  veterinary  sciences.  This  is  a  clear  and  concise  statement  of  the 
structure  of  the  principal  domesticated  animals  —  an  exhaustive  gross 
anatomy  of  the  horse,  ox,  pig,  and  dog,  including  the  splanchnology  of 
the  sheep,  presented  in  a  form  never  before  approached  for  practical 
usefulness. 

Prof.  E.  D.  Harris,  North  Dakota  Agricultural  College:  "  It  is  the  best 
of  its  kind  in  the  English  language.  It  is  quite  free  from  errors." 


Ophthalmology  for  Veterinarians.  By  WALTER  N.  SHARP,  M.  D., 
Professor  of  Ophthalmology,  Indiana  Veterinary  College.  I2mo 
of  210  pages,  illustrated.  Cloth,  $2.00  net. 

This  new  work  covers  a  much  neglected  but  important  field  of  veter- 
inary practice.  Dr.  Sharp  has  presented  his  subject  in  a  concise,  crisp 
way,  so  that  you  can  pick  up  his  book  and  get  to  "  the  point "  quickly. 
He  first  gives  you  the  anatomy  of  the  eye,  then  examination,  the  various 
Diseases,  including  injuries,  parasites,  errors  of  refraction. 
Dr.  George  H.  Glover,  Agricultural  Experiment  Station,  Fort  Collins: 
"  It  is  the  best  book  on  the  subject  on  the  market." 


Saunders'  College  Text-Books 


Personal  Hygiene.  Edited  by  WALTER  L.  PYLE,  M.  D.,  Fellow 
of  the  American  Academy  of  Medicine.  i2mo  of  543  pages,  illus- 
trated. Cloth,  $i.  50  net.  New  (6th)  Edition. 

Dr.  Pyle's  work  sets  forth  the  best  means  of  preventing  disease  —  the  best 
means  to  perfect  health.  It  tells  you  how  to  care  for  the  teeth,  skin, 
complexion,  and  hair.  It  takes  up  mouth  breathing,  catching  cold, 
care  of  the  vocal  cords,  care  of  the  eyes,  school  hygiene,  body  posture, 
ventilation,  house-cleaning,  etc.  There  are  chapters  on  food  adulter- 
ation (by  Dr.  Harvey  W.  Wiley]  ,  domestic  hygiene,  and  home  gymnastics. 
Canadian  Teacher:  "Such  a  complete  and  authoritative  treatise 
should  be  in  the  hands  of  every  teacher." 


Personal  Hygiene  and  Physical  Training  for  Women  By 
ANNA  M.  GALBRAITH,  M.  D.,  Fellow  New  York  Academy  of 
Medicine.  iamo  of  371  pages,  illustrated.  Cloth,  $2.00  net. 

Dr.  Galbraith's  book  meets  a  need  long  existing  —  a  need  for  a  simple 
manual  of  personal  hygiene  and  physical  training  for  women  along  sci- 
entific lines.  There  are  chapters  on  hair,  hands  and  feet,  dress,  devel- 
opment of  the  form,  and  the  attainment  of  good  carriage  by  dancing, 
walking,  running,  swimming,  rowing,  etc. 

Dr.  Harry  B.  Boice,  Trenton  State  Normal  School:  "It  is  intensely 
interesting  and  is  the  finest  work  of  the  kind  of  which  I  know." 


Exercise  in  Education  and  Medicine.  By  R.  TAIT  McKHNZiE, 
M.  D.,  Professor  of  Physical  Education,  University  of  Pennsyl- 
vania. Octavo  of  585  pages,  with  478  illustrations.  Cloth,  $4.00 
net.  New  (2d)  Edition. 

Chapters  of  special  value  in  college  work  are  those  on  exercise  by  the 
different  systems:  play-grounds,  physical  education  in  school,  college, 
and  university. 

D.  A.  Sargent,  M.  D.,  Hemenway  Gymnasium:  "It  should  be  in  the 
hands  of  every  physical  educator." 


Saunders'  College  Text-Books 


Normal  Histology  and  Organography. 
i2mo  of  483  pages,  337  illustrations. 


By  CHARLES  HILL,  M.  D., 

Flexible  leather,  $2.25  net. 

Ntw  (3d)  Edition. 


Dr.  Hill's  work  is  characterized  by  a  brevity  of  style,  yet  a  complete- 
ness of  discussion,  rarely  met  in  a  book  of  this  size.  The  entire  field 
is  covered,  beginning  with  the  preparation  of  material,  the  cell,  the 
various  tissues,  on  through  the  different  organs  and  regions,  and  end- 
ing with  fixing  and  staining  solutions. 

Dr.  E.  P.  Porterfield,  St.  Louis  University:  "  I  am  very  much  gratified 
to  find  so  handy  a  work.  It  is  so  full  and  complete  that  it  meets  all 
requirements." 


m,  li 

Histology.  By  A.  A.  BOHM,  M.  D.,  and  M.  VON  DAVIDOFF, 
M.  D.,  of  Munich.  Edited  by  G.  CARL  HUBER,  M.  D.,  Professor 
of  Embryology  at  the  Wistar  Institute,  University  of  Pennsyl- 
vania. Octavo  of  528  pages,  377  illustrations.  Flexible  cloth,  $3. 50 
net.  Second  Edition. 

This  work  is  conceded  to  be  the  most  complete  text-book  on  human 
histology  published.  Particularly  full  on  microscopic  technic  and 
staining,  it  is  especially  serviceable  in  the  laboratory.  Every  step  in 
technic  is  clearly  and  precisely  detailed.  It  is  a  work  you  can  depend 
upon  always. 

New  York  Medical  Journal :  "  There  can  be  nothing  but  praise  for 
this  model  text-book  and  laboratory  guide." 


Military  Hygiene  and  Sanitation.  By  LIEUT.-COL.  FRANK  R. 
KEEFER,  Professor  of  Military  Hygiene,  United  States  Military 
Academy,  West  Point.  i2mo  of  305  pages,  illustrated.  Cloth, 
$1.50  net. 

You  get  here  chapters  on  the  care  of  troops,  recruits  and  recruiting,  per- 
sonal hygiene,  physical  training,  preventable  diseases,  clothing,  equip- 
ment, water-supply,  foods  and  their  preparation,  hygiene  and  sanitation 
of  posts,  barracks,  the  troopship,  marches,  camps,  and  battlefields;  dis- 
posal of  wastes,  tropic  and  arctic  service,  venereal  diseases,  alcohol,  etc. 


Saunders'  College  Text-Books 


KftffiL® 

General  Bacteriology.  By  EDWIN  O.  JORDAN,  Ph.  D.,  Professor 
of  Bacteriology,  University  of  Chicago.  Octavo  of  650  pages, 
illustrated.  Just  Out— New  (sth)  Edition. 

This  work  treats  fully  of  the  bacteriology  of  plants,  milk  and  milk 
products,  dairying,  agriculture,  water,  food  preservation;  of  leather 
tanning,  vinegar  making,  tobacco  curing;  of  household  administration 
and  sanitary  engineering.  A  chapter  of  prime  importance  to  all  stu- 
dents of  botany,  horticulture,  and  agriculture  is  that  on  the  bacterial 
diseases  of  plants. 

Prof.  T.  J.  Burrill,  University  of  Illinois:  "I  am  using  Jordan's  Bac- 
teriology for  class  work  and  am  convinced  that  it  is  the  best  text  in 
existence." 


Bacteriologic  Technic.  By  J.  W.  H.  EYRE,  M.  D.,  Bacteriologist 
to  Guy's  Hospital,  London.  Octavo  of  525  pages,  illustrated. 
Cloth,  $3.00  net.  Second  Edition. 

Dr.  Eyre  gives  clearly  the  technic  for  the  bacteriologic  examination  of 
water,  sewage,  air,  soil,  milk  and  its  products,  meats,  etc.  It  is  a  work 
of  much  value  in  the  laboratory.  The  illustrations  are  practical  and 
serve  well  to  clarify  the  text.  The  book  has  been  greatly  enlarged. 
The  London  Lancet:  "  It  is  a  work  for  all  technical  students,  whether 
of  brewing,  dairying,  or  agriculture." 


Ch«ffiHic&S 


Qualitative  Chemical  Analysis.  By  A.  R.  BLISS,  JR.,  Ph.  G.,  M.  D., 
Professor  of  Chemistry  and  Pharmacy,  Birmingham  Medical  Col- 
lege. Octavo  of  250  pages.  Cloth,  $2.00  net. 

This  work  was  prepared  specially  for  laboratory  workers  in  the  fields 
of  medicine,  dentistry,  and  pharmacy.  It  gives  you  systematic  pro- 
cedures for  the  detection  and  separation  of  the  most  common  bases  and 
acids,  and  in  such  a  manner  that,  in  a  short  time,  you  will  be  enabled 
to  gain  a  good  practical  knowledge  of  the  theory  and  methods  of  quali- 
tative chemical  analysis. 


Saunders*  College  Text-Books 


Elements  of  Nutrition.  By  GRAHAM  LUSK,  Ph.  D.,  Professor  of 
Physiology,  Cornell  Medical  School.  Octavo  of  402  pages,  illus 
trated.  Cloth,  $3.00  net.  Second  Edition. 

The  clear  and  practical  presentation  of  starvation,  regulation  of  tem- 
perature, the  influence  of  protein  food,  the  specific  dynamic  action 
of  food-stuffs,  the  influence  of  fat. and  carbohydrate  ingestion  and  of 
mechanical  work  render  the  work  unusually  valuable.  It  will  prove 
extremely  helpful  to  students  of  animal  dietetics  and  of  metabolism 
generally. 

Dr.  A.  P.  Brubaker,  Jefferson  Medical  College:  "  It  is  undoubtedly  the 
best  presentation  of  the  subject  in  English.  The  work  is  indispensable." 


Physiology.     By  WILLIAM  H.  HOWELL,  M.  D.,  Ph.  D.,  Professor 

of  Physiology,  Johns  Hopkins  University.     Octavo  of  1020  pages, 

,    illustrated.     Cloth,  $4.00  net.  New  (6th)  Edition. 

Dr.  Howell's  work  on  human  physiology  has  been  aptly  termed  a 
"storehouse  of  physiologic  fact  and  scientific  theory."  You  will  at 
once  be  impressed  with  the  fact  that  you  are  in  touch  with  an  expe- 
rienced teacher  and  investigator. 

Prof.  G.  H.  Caldwell,  University  of  North  Dakota:  "Of  all  the  text- 
books on  physiology  which  I  have  examined,  Howell's  is  the  best." 


Hygiene.  By  D.  H.  BERGKV,  M.  D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Bac- 
teriology, University  of  Pennsylvania.  Octavo  of  529  pages,  illus- 
trated. Cloth,  $3.00  net.  New  (sth)  Edition. 

Dr.  Bergey  gives  first  place  to  ventilation,  water-supply,  sewage,  indus- 
trial and  school  hygiene,  etc.  His  long  experience  in  teaching  this  sub- 
ject has  made  him  familiar  with  teaching  needs. 

J.  N.  Hurty,  M.  D.,  Indiana  University:  "  It  is  one  of  the  best  books 
with  which  I  am  acquainted." 


IO  Saunders*  College  Text-Books 


Momrow's 

Immediate  Care  of  the  Injured.  By  ALBERT  S.  MORROW,  M.  D., 
Adjunct  Professor  of  Surgery,  New  York  Polyclinic.  Octavo  of 
360  pages,  242  illustrations.  Cloth,  $2.50  net.  Second  Edition. 

Dr.  Morrow's  book  tells  you  just  what  to  do  in  any  emergency,  and  it 
is  illustrated  in  such  a  practical  way  that  the  idea  is  caught  at  once. 
There  is  no  book  better  adapted  to  first-aid  class  work. 

Health:  "Here  is  a  book  that  should  find  a  place  in  every  workshop 
and  factory  and  should  be  made  a  text-book  in  our  schools." 


American  Illustrated  Medical  Dictionary.  By  W.  A.  NEWMAN 
BORLAND,  M.  D.,  Member  of  Committee  on  Nomenclature  and 
Classification  of  Diseases,  American  Medical  Association.  Octavo 
of  1137  pages,  with  323  illustrations,  119  in  colors.  Flexible 
leather,  $4.50  net;  thumb  indexed,  $5.00  net.  New  (8th)  Edition. 

If  you  want  an  unabridged  medical  dictionary,  this  is  the  one  you 
want.  It  is  down  to  the  minute;  its  definitions  are  concise,  yet  accu- 
rate and  clear;  it  is  extremely  easy  to  consult;  it  defines  all  the  newest 
terms  in  medicine  and  the  allied  subjects;  it  is  profusely  illustrated. 
John  B.  Murphy,  M.  D.,  Northwestern  University:  "It  is  unquestion- 
ably the  best  lexicon  on  medical  topics  in  the  English  language,  and 
with  all  that,  it  is  so  compact  for  ready  reference." 


American  Pocket  Medical  Dictionary.  Edited  by  W.  A.  NEW- 
MAN BORLAND,  M.  B.  693  pages.  Flexible  leather,  $1.00  net; 
thumb  index,  $1.25  net.  New  (gth)  Edition. 

A  dictionary  must  be  full  enough  to  give  the  student  the  information 
he  seeks,  clearly  and  simply,  yet  it  must  not  confuse  him  with  detail. 
The  editor  has  kept  this  in  mind  in  compiling  this  Pocket  Dictionary. 

I.  V.  S.  Stanislaus,  M.  D.,  Medico-Chirurgical  College:  "We  have 
been  strongly  recommending  this  little  book  as  being  the  very  best." 

DESCRIPTIVE   CIRCULARS   OF  ALL   BOOKS    SENT   FREE 


THIS  BCK  "H  LAST 


TL 


3453*3 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY